WO2019119174A1 - Method and device used in user equipment and in base station for wireless communication - Google Patents

Method and device used in user equipment and in base station for wireless communication Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019119174A1
WO2019119174A1 PCT/CN2017/116804 CN2017116804W WO2019119174A1 WO 2019119174 A1 WO2019119174 A1 WO 2019119174A1 CN 2017116804 W CN2017116804 W CN 2017116804W WO 2019119174 A1 WO2019119174 A1 WO 2019119174A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
antenna port
reference signals
information
symbols
positive integer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/116804
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张晓博
Original Assignee
南通朗恒通信技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 南通朗恒通信技术有限公司 filed Critical 南通朗恒通信技术有限公司
Priority to CN201780094871.6A priority Critical patent/CN111108797B/en
Priority to CN202310059650.2A priority patent/CN116828599A/en
Priority to CN202310060942.8A priority patent/CN116939822A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2017/116804 priority patent/WO2019119174A1/en
Publication of WO2019119174A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019119174A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting wireless signals in a wireless communication system, and more particularly to a method and apparatus for transmitting wireless signals in a wireless communication system supporting a cellular network.
  • LTE Long-term Evolution
  • LAA Licensed Assisted Access
  • Massive MIMO Multi-Input Multi-Output
  • LBT Long Term Evolution
  • the transmission of uplink wireless signals for multiple beams may require multiple beamforming-based LBT processes, and the multiple LBTs may generate uplink wireless signals on only a portion of the multiple beams that can be transmitted, thus
  • the transmission scheme of multi-beam uplink wireless signals under LBT is a key problem to be solved.
  • the present application discloses a solution. It should be noted that, in the case of no conflict, the features in the embodiments and embodiments in the UE (User Equipment) of the present application can be applied to the base station, and vice versa. Further, the features of the embodiments and the embodiments of the present application may be combined with each other arbitrarily without conflict.
  • the present application discloses a method in a user equipment for wireless communication, which includes:
  • the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
  • the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references
  • the signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
  • the essence of the foregoing method is that the first access detection corresponds to one or more beamforming-based LBTs, and different LBTs may be monitored by using different beams, and the one or more LBT beams and base stations are expected.
  • the plurality of beams of the uplink reference signal transmitted on the N multi-carrier symbols respectively correspond to each other; after the LBT of a certain beam passes, the user equipment can send the uplink reference signal on the multi-carrier symbol corresponding to the beam; if a certain beam If the LBT does not pass, the user equipment may not send the uplink reference signal on the multi-carrier symbol corresponding to the beam.
  • the advantage of the above method is that, by the correspondence between the reference signal and the LBT, the user equipment can transmit the reference signal on the channel not occupied by a certain beam according to the channel occupancy condition on the actual different beams, thereby avoiding multiple transmissions.
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the transmission power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is present.
  • the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and after the M multi-carrier symbols.
  • the essence of the foregoing method is that the transmission of the M reference signals and the M1 reference signals are respectively after the LBTs on the two different beams; the beam direction limitations corresponding to the uplink reference signals corresponding to the same LBT are corresponding.
  • the base station in order for the base station to know whether there is a better beam in the beam direction outside the LBT beam, it is necessary to perform a fair comparison of multiple reference signal transmissions corresponding to multiple LBT beams, thus requiring the user equipment to The same transmit power is used when transmitting these multiple reference signals.
  • the advantage of using the above method is that the same transmit power is used for multiple reference signals corresponding to multiple LBT beams for fair channel/beam quality comparison.
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
  • the above method is characterized in that an air interface resource occupied by a target reference signal group is used by a receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarriers from the N multicarrier symbols a symbol, the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S preparations
  • the selected air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols,
  • the S is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the essence of the foregoing method is that the base station detects signals on N multi-carrier symbols, and further detects M reference signals by detecting the target reference signal group; in detecting the target reference signal group, the base station adopts The S candidate air interface resources are detected, and the best candidate air interface resource is the air interface resource of the target reference signal group.
  • the advantage of using the above method is that the remaining reference signals of the M reference signals can be further detected by blindly detecting one or more reference signals of the M reference signals, so that the base station can know which reference signal transmission beams do not pass the uplink LBT. .
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the present invention discloses a method in a base station device for wireless communication, which includes:
  • the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references
  • the signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the transmission power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is present.
  • the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and after the M multi-carrier symbols.
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
  • the above method is characterized in that an air interface resource occupied by a target reference signal group is used by a receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarriers from the N multicarrier symbols a symbol, the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S preparations
  • the selected air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols,
  • the S is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the above method is characterized by comprising:
  • the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the present application discloses a user equipment for wireless communication, which includes:
  • the first receiver module receives the first information, the first information is used to determine N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, the N is a positive integer greater than 1; performing the first access detection, determining M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols;
  • a first transmitter module for each of the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, transmitting M reference signals respectively in the M multi-carrier symbols;
  • the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references
  • the signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
  • the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the first transmitter module further transmits M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band; wherein the M1 reference signals Any of The transmit power of the reference signal is the same as the transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment, the multi-carrier not occupied by the user equipment The symbol is preceded by the M1 multicarrier symbols and after the M multicarrier symbols.
  • the user equipment is characterized in that the first receiver module further receives second information, wherein the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, Any of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; and the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the user equipment is characterized in that the first receiver module further receives third information, wherein the third information is used to determine transmission of any one of the M1 reference signals.
  • the power is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and the reception of the third information precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
  • the user equipment is characterized in that the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is used by the receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multi-carrier symbols from the N multi-carrier symbols.
  • the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate
  • the air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, S is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the first receiver module further receives fourth information, where the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S Multi-carrier symbol group.
  • the present application discloses a base station device for wireless communication, which includes:
  • a second transmitter module transmitting first information, where the first information is used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first subband, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
  • a second receiver module for each of the M multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, receiving M reference signals respectively in the M multi-carrier symbols;
  • the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references
  • the signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
  • the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second receiver module further receives M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band; wherein the M1 reference signals
  • the transmission power of any one of the reference signals is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is present, and the user equipment is not
  • the occupied multicarrier symbols are before the M1 multicarrier symbols and after the M multicarrier symbols.
  • the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second transmitter module further sends second information
  • the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second transmitter module further sends third information
  • the third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
  • the user equipment is characterized in that the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is used by the receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multi-carrier symbols from the N multi-carrier symbols.
  • the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate Air interface resources are used separately S multi-carrier symbol groups, any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups being composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, the S being greater than 1 A positive integer.
  • the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second transmitter module further sends fourth information
  • the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the present application has the following main technical advantages over the prior art:
  • the one or more LBT beams respectively correspond to the plurality of beams of the uplink reference signal expected by the base station; after the LBT of a certain beam passes, the user equipment can send the uplink reference signal on the multicarrier symbol corresponding to the beam; The LBT of the beam does not pass, and the user equipment may not send the uplink reference signal on the multi-carrier symbol corresponding to the beam.
  • the user equipment can transmit the reference signal on the channel that is not occupied by a certain beam according to the channel occupancy condition on the actual different beams, thereby avoiding that multiple transmitters occupy the same frequency resource at the same time. And the interference.
  • the remaining reference signals can be further detected, so that the base station can know which reference signal transmission beams have not passed the uplink LBT.
  • FIG. 1 shows a flow chart of first information, first access detection, and M reference signals in accordance with one embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture in accordance with one embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a radio protocol architecture of a user plane and a control plane in accordance with one embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of an evolved node and a UE according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 shows a flow chart of wireless transmission in accordance with one embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6 shows a flow chart of wireless transmission in accordance with another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 7A-7E are schematic diagrams showing the relationship of N multicarrier symbols, N1 antenna port groups, and M reference signals, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 8A-8E are schematic diagrams showing the relationship of N3 multicarrier symbols, Q antenna port groups, and M1 reference signals, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship of M1 reference signals and M reference signals according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of M reference signals used to determine M multi-carrier symbols from N multi-carrier symbols, in accordance with an embodiment of the present application
  • 11A-11B are schematic diagrams showing a relationship between a first access detection and an N1 antenna port group, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 12A-12B respectively show schematic diagrams of spatial relationships for a given access detection and a given wireless signal, in accordance with one embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 13 shows a schematic diagram of an antenna port and an antenna port group in accordance with one embodiment of the present application
  • 14A-14B are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between a second access detection and a Q antenna port group, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 15A-15C respectively show schematic diagrams of one access detection according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the structure of a processing device for use in a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the structure of a processing apparatus used in a base station apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Embodiment 1 illustrates a flow chart of the first information, the first access detection, and the M reference signals, as shown in FIG.
  • the user equipment in the present application receives first information, where the first information is used to determine N multi-carrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one; Performing a first access detection, determining M multi-carrier symbols in the N multi-carrier symbols; and for the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, only the M multi-carriers therein Transmitting M reference signals respectively; wherein the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols being allocated to N1
  • the antenna port group, the M reference signals are sent by the U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, and the U1 is not greater than the M A positive integer, the N1 being a positive integer not greater than the N.
  • the M reference signals include one or more of a ⁇ SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) and an Upstream PTRS (Phase-Tracking Reference Signal).
  • ⁇ SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • Upstream PTRS Phase-Tracking Reference Signal
  • the first information is semi-statically configured.
  • the first information is carried by higher layer signaling.
  • the first information is carried by RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the first information is all or a part of an IE (Information Element) in one RRC signaling.
  • the first information is carried by a MAC (Medium Access Control) CE (Control Element) signaling.
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • CE Control Element
  • the first information is transmitted in an SIB (System Information Block).
  • SIB System Information Block
  • the first information is dynamically configured.
  • the first information is carried by physical layer signaling.
  • the first information belongs to DCI (Downlink Control Information).
  • the first information is a field in a DCI, and the field includes a positive integer number of bits.
  • the first information is carried by a downlink physical layer control channel (ie, a downlink channel that can only be used to carry physical layer signaling).
  • a downlink physical layer control channel ie, a downlink channel that can only be used to carry physical layer signaling.
  • the first information is carried by a PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel).
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • the first information is carried by an sPDCCH (short PDCCH).
  • the first information is carried by an NR-PDCCH (New Radio PDCCH).
  • NR-PDCCH New Radio PDCCH
  • the first information is carried by a NB-PDCCH (Narrow Band PDCCH).
  • NB-PDCCH Narrow Band PDCCH
  • the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of PRBs (Physical Resource Blocks).
  • PRBs Physical Resource Blocks
  • the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of consecutive PRBs.
  • the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of RBs (Resource Blocks).
  • the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of consecutive RBs.
  • the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of consecutive sub-carriers.
  • the first sub-band includes a number of consecutive sub-carriers equal to a positive integer multiple of 12.
  • the first sub-band is deployed in an unlicensed spectrum.
  • the first sub-band belongs to one carrier.
  • the first sub-band belongs to a BWP (Bandwidth Part).
  • the multi-carrier symbol is an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) symbol.
  • the multi-carrier symbol is a SC-FDMA (Single-Carrier Frequency-Division Multiple Access) symbol.
  • SC-FDMA Single-Carrier Frequency-Division Multiple Access
  • the multi-carrier symbol is a FBMC (Filter Bank Multi Carrier) symbol.
  • the multi-carrier symbol includes a CP (Cyclic Prefix).
  • the M reference signals are used by a receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, where M is not greater than the N Positive integer.
  • Embodiment 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of a network architecture, as shown in FIG.
  • Embodiment 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of a network architecture in accordance with the present application, as shown in FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an NR 5G, LTE (Long-Term Evolution, Long Term Evolution) and LTE-A (Long-Term Evolution Advanced) system network architecture 200.
  • the NR 5G or LTE network architecture 200 may be referred to as an EPS (Evolved Packet System) 200 in some other suitable terminology.
  • EPS Evolved Packet System
  • the EPS 200 may include one or more UEs (User Equipment) 201, NG-RAN (Next Generation Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core)/5G-CN (5G-Core Network) , 5G core network) 210, HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 220 and Internet service 230.
  • UEs User Equipment
  • NG-RAN Next Generation Radio Access Network
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • 5G-Core Network 5G-Core Network
  • 5G core network 5G core network
  • HSS Home Subscriber Server
  • Internet service 230 Internet service 230.
  • EPS can be interconnected with other access networks, but these entities/interfaces are not shown for simplicity.
  • the EPS provides packet switching services, although those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that the various concepts presented throughout this application can be extended to networks or other cellular networks that provide circuit switched services.
  • the NG-RAN includes an NR Node B (gNB) 203 and other gNBs 204
  • the gNB 203 provides user and control plane protocol termination for the UE 201.
  • the gNB 203 can be connected to other gNBs 204 via an Xn interface (eg, a backhaul).
  • the gNB 203 may also be referred to as a base station, base transceiver station, radio base station, radio transceiver, transceiver function, basic service set (BSS), extended service set (ESS), TRP (transmission and reception point), or some other suitable terminology.
  • the gNB 203 provides the UE 201 with an access point to the EPC/5G-CN 210.
  • Examples of UEs 201 include cellular telephones, smart phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, laptop computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), satellite radios, non-terrestrial base station communications, satellite mobile communications, global positioning systems, multimedia devices , video device, digital audio player (eg, MP3 player), camera, game console, drone, aircraft, narrowband physical network device, machine type communication device, land vehicle, car, wearable device, or any Other similar functional devices.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • satellite radios non-terrestrial base station communications
  • satellite mobile communications global positioning systems
  • multimedia devices video device, digital audio player (eg, MP3 player), camera, game console, drone, aircraft, narrowband physical network device, machine type communication device, land vehicle, car, wearable device, or any Other similar functional devices.
  • multimedia devices video device, digital audio player (eg, MP3 player), camera, game console, drone, aircraft, narrowband physical network device, machine type communication device, land vehicle
  • UE 201 may also refer to UE 201 as a mobile station, a subscriber station, a mobile unit, a subscriber unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a mobile device, a wireless device, a wireless communication device, a remote device, a mobile subscriber station, an access terminal, Mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client or some other suitable term.
  • the gNB203 is connected to the EPC/5G-CN210 through the S1/NG interface.
  • EPC/5G-CN210 includes MME/AMF/UPF 211, other MME (Mobility Management Entity)/AMF (Authentication Management Field)/UPF (User Plane Function) 214, S-GW (Service Gateway) 212 and P-GW (Packet Date Network Gateway) 213.
  • the MME/AMF/UPF 211 is a control node that handles signaling between the UE 201 and the EPC/5G-CN 210.
  • MME/AMF/UPF 211 provides bearer and connection management. All User IP (Internet Protocol) packets are transmitted through the S-GW 212, and the S-GW 212 itself is connected to the P-GW 213.
  • P-GW213 provides UE IP Address assignment and other features.
  • the P-GW 213 is connected to the Internet service 230.
  • the Internet service 230 includes an operator-compatible Internet Protocol service, and may specifically include the Internet, an intranet, an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem), and a PS Streaming Service (PSS
  • the UE 201 corresponds to the user equipment in this application.
  • the gNB 203 corresponds to the base station in the present application.
  • the UE 201 supports wireless communication for data transmission over an unlicensed spectrum.
  • the gNB 203 supports wireless communication for data transmission over an unlicensed spectrum.
  • the UE 201 supports wireless communication of massive MIMO.
  • the gNB 203 supports wireless communication for massive MIMO.
  • Embodiment 3 shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a radio protocol architecture of a user plane and a control plane in accordance with the present application, as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an embodiment of a radio protocol architecture for a user plane and a control plane, and FIG. 3 shows a radio protocol architecture for user equipment (UE) and base station equipment (gNB or eNB) in three layers: layer 1, layer 2 and layer 3.
  • Layer 1 (L1 layer) is the lowest layer and implements various PHY (physical layer) signal processing functions.
  • the L1 layer will be referred to herein as PHY 301.
  • Layer 2 (L2 layer) 305 is above PHY 301 and is responsible for the link between the UE and the gNB through PHY 301.
  • the L2 layer 305 includes a MAC (Medium Access Control) sublayer 302, an RLC (Radio Link Control) sublayer 303, and a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol). Convergence Protocol) Sublayer 304, which terminates at the gNB on the network side.
  • the UE may have several upper layers above the L2 layer 305, including a network layer (eg, an IP layer) terminated at the P-GW on the network side and terminated at the other end of the connection (eg, Application layer at the remote UE, server, etc.).
  • the PDCP sublayer 304 provides multiplexing between different radio bearers and logical channels.
  • the PDCP sublayer 304 also provides header compression for upper layer data packets to reduce radio transmission overhead, provides security by encrypting data packets, and provides handoff support for UEs between gNBs.
  • the RLC sublayer 303 provides segmentation and reassembly of upper layer data packets, retransmission of lost data packets, and reordering of data packets to compensate for out-of-order reception due to HARQ.
  • the MAC sublayer 302 provides multiplexing between the logical and transport channels.
  • the MAC sublayer 302 is also responsible for allocating various radio resources (e.g., resource blocks) in one cell between UEs.
  • the MAC sublayer 302 is also responsible for HARQ operations.
  • the radio protocol architecture for the UE and gNB is substantially the same for the physical layer 301 and the L2 layer 305, but there is no header compression function for the control plane.
  • the control plane also includes an RRC (Radio Resource Control) sublayer 306 in Layer 3 (L3 layer).
  • the RRC sublayer 306 is responsible for obtaining radio resources (ie, radio bearers) and configuring the lower layer using RRC signaling between the gNB and the UE.
  • the wireless protocol architecture of Figure 3 is applicable to the user equipment in this application.
  • the radio protocol architecture of Figure 3 is applicable to the base station in this application.
  • the first information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
  • the first information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
  • the first information in the present application is generated by the PHY 301.
  • the first access detection in the present application is generated by the PHY 301.
  • the M reference signals in the present application are generated by the PHY 301.
  • the M1 reference signals in the present application are generated by the PHY 301.
  • the second information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
  • the second information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
  • the third information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
  • the third information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
  • the third information in the present application is generated by the PHY 301.
  • the fourth information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
  • the fourth information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
  • Embodiment 4 shows a schematic diagram of a base station device and a user equipment according to the present application, as shown in FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a gNB 410 in communication with a UE 450 in an access network.
  • the base station device (410) includes a controller/processor 440, a memory 430, a receive processor 412, a transmit processor 415, a transmitter/receiver 416, and an antenna 420.
  • the user equipment (450) includes a controller/processor 490, a memory 480, a data source 467, a transmit processor 455, a receive processor 452, a transmitter/receiver 456, and an antenna 460.
  • the processing related to the base station device (410) includes:
  • a controller/processor 440 the upper layer packet arrives, the controller/processor 440 provides header compression, encryption, packet segmentation and reordering, and multiplexing and demultiplexing between the logical and transport channels for implementation
  • the L2 layer protocol of the user plane and the control plane; the upper layer packet may include data or control information, such as a DL-SCH (Downlink Shared Channel);
  • controller/processor 440 associated with a memory 430 storing program code and data, which may be a computer readable medium;
  • controller/processor 440 including a scheduling unit to transmit a demand, and a scheduling unit, configured to schedule an air interface resource corresponding to the transmission requirement;
  • controller/processor 440 determining first information
  • the transmit processor 415 receives the output bit stream of the controller/processor 440 and implements various signal transmission processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including encoding, interleaving, scrambling, modulation, power control/allocation, and physics. Layer control signaling (including PBCH, PDCCH, PHICH, PCFICH, reference signal) generation, etc.;
  • a transmitter 416 is configured to convert the baseband signals provided by the transmit processor 415 into radio frequency signals and transmit them via the antenna 420; each of the transmitters 416 samples the respective input symbol streams to obtain respective sampled signal streams. Each transmitter 416 performs further processing (eg, digital to analog conversion, amplification, filtering, upconversion, etc.) on the respective sample streams to obtain a downlink signal.
  • further processing eg, digital to analog conversion, amplification, filtering, upconversion, etc.
  • the processing related to the user equipment (450) may include:
  • Receiver 456, for converting the radio frequency signal received through the antenna 460 into a baseband signal is provided to the receiving processor 452;
  • the receiving processor 452 implements various signal receiving processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including decoding, deinterleaving, descrambling, demodulation, and physical layer control signaling extraction, and the like;
  • controller/processor 490 determining first information
  • the controller/processor 490 receives the bit stream output by the receiving processor 452, provides header decompression, decryption, packet segmentation and reordering, and multiplexing and demultiplexing between the logical and transport channels for implementation.
  • Controller/processor 490 is associated with memory 480 that stores program codes and data.
  • Memory 480 can be a computer readable medium.
  • the processing related to the base station device (410) includes:
  • the receiver 416 receives the radio frequency signal through its corresponding antenna 420, converts the received radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and supplies the baseband signal to the receiving processor 412;
  • the receiving processor 412 implements various signal receiving processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including decoding, deinterleaving, descrambling, demodulation, and physical layer control signaling extraction, and the like;
  • Controller/processor 440 implementing L2 layer functions, and associated with memory 430 storing program code and data;
  • Controller/processor 440 provides demultiplexing, packet reassembly, decryption, header decompression, control signal processing between the transport and logical channels to recover upper layer data packets from UE 450; from controller/processor 440 On Layer packets can be provided to the core network;
  • controller/processor 440 determining M reference signals
  • the processing related to the user equipment (450) includes:
  • Data source 467 provides the upper layer data packet to controller/processor 490.
  • Data source 467 represents all protocol layers above the L2 layer;
  • the transmitter 456, transmits a radio frequency signal through its corresponding antenna 460, converts the baseband signal into a radio frequency signal, and provides the radio frequency signal to the corresponding antenna 460;
  • the transmitter processor 455 implements various signal receiving processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including decoding, deinterleaving, descrambling, demodulation, and physical layer control signaling extraction, and the like;
  • the controller/processor 490 implements header compression, encryption, packet segmentation and reordering, and multiplexing between logical and transport channels based on the radio resource allocation of the gNB 410, implementing the L2 layer for the user plane and the control plane Features;
  • the controller/processor 490 is also responsible for HARQ operations, retransmission of lost packets, and signaling to the gNB 410;
  • controller/processor 490 determining M reference signals
  • the UE 450 apparatus includes: at least one processor and at least one memory, the at least one memory including computer program code; the at least one memory and the computer program code are configured to be The processor is used together, and the UE 450 device is at least:
  • the UE 450 includes a memory storing a computer readable instruction program that, when executed by at least one processor, generates an action, the action comprising:
  • the gNB 410 apparatus includes: at least one processor and at least one memory, the at least one memory including computer program code; the at least one memory and the computer program code are configured to be The processor is used together.
  • the gNB410 device is at least:
  • the gNB 410 includes a memory storing a computer readable instruction program that, when executed by at least one processor, generates an action, the action comprising:
  • the UE 450 corresponds to the user equipment in this application.
  • gNB 410 corresponds to the base station in this application.
  • At least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the first information in the present application.
  • At least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the first information in the present application.
  • At least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the second information in the present application.
  • At least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the second information in the present application.
  • At least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the third information in the present application.
  • At least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the third information in the present application.
  • At least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the fourth information in the present application.
  • At least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the fourth information in the present application.
  • At least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to perform the first access detection in this application.
  • At least two of the transmitter 456, the transmit processor 455, and the controller/processor 490 are used to transmit the M reference signals in the present application.
  • At least one of the receiver 416, the receive processor 412, and the controller/processor 440 The first two are used to receive the M reference signals in this application.
  • At least two of the transmitter 456, the transmit processor 455, and the controller/processor 490 are used to transmit the M1 reference signals in the present application.
  • At least two of the receiver 416, the receive processor 412, and the controller/processor 440 are used to receive the M1 reference signals in the present application.
  • Embodiment 5 illustrates a flow chart of a wireless transmission, as shown in FIG.
  • base station N01 is a serving cell maintenance base station of user equipment U02.
  • blocks F1, F2 and F3 are optional.
  • the second information is received in step S20; the first information is received in step S21; the fourth information is received in step S22; the first access detection is performed in step S23; and M reference signals are transmitted in step S24.
  • the first information is used by the U02 to determine N multi-carrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N is a positive integer greater than 1; the U02 performs a first access detection, Determining M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols; for the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, transmitting M references respectively in only the M multi-carrier symbols
  • the M reference signals are used by the N01 to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated by the N01 to the N1 antenna port groups.
  • the M reference signals are sent by the U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups, where M is a positive integer not greater than the N, and the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M.
  • the N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N. Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in the M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, and transmitting power of any one of the M1 reference signals and any one of the M reference signals The transmission power is the same, at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols after that.
  • the second information is used by the U02 to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group A positive integer number of antenna ports is included; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the third information is used by the U02 to determine that the transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, the third information The reception is prior to the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
  • the fourth information is used by the U02 to determine that the S candidate air interface resources in the present application respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups in the application.
  • the M1 reference signals include one or more of ⁇ SRS, uplink PTRS ⁇ .
  • the M is smaller than the N.
  • the M1 multicarrier symbols are associated to the M multicarrier symbols.
  • the M1 multi-carrier symbols are associated with the M multi-carrier symbols, where the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols belong to a first time window in a time domain. .
  • the M1 multi-carrier symbols are associated with the M multi-carrier symbols, wherein the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols are used in the same measurement process.
  • the same measurement process is Beam Management and/or channel estimation.
  • the M1 multicarrier symbols and the M multicarrier symbols belong to two uplink bursts, respectively.
  • given that a multi-carrier symbol is occupied means that the given multi-carrier symbol is used to transmit a wireless signal.
  • given that a multi-carrier symbol is unoccupied means that the given multi-carrier symbol is not used to transmit a wireless signal.
  • given that a multi-carrier symbol is occupied by a user equipment means that the given multi-carrier symbol is used by the user equipment to transmit a wireless signal.
  • given that the multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment means that the given multi-carrier symbol is not used by the user equipment to transmit a wireless signal.
  • the second information is semi-statically configured.
  • the second information is carried by higher layer signaling.
  • the second information is carried by RRC signaling.
  • the second information is all or a part of an IE in one RRC signaling.
  • the second information is carried by MAC CE signaling.
  • the second information is transmitted in the SIB.
  • the third information is semi-statically configured.
  • the third information is carried by higher layer signaling.
  • the third information is carried by RRC signaling.
  • the third information is all or a part of an IE in one RRC signaling.
  • the third information is carried by MAC CE signaling.
  • the third information is transmitted in the SIB.
  • the third information is dynamically configured.
  • the third information is carried by physical layer signaling.
  • the third information belongs to a DCI.
  • the third information is a domain in a DCI, the domain comprising a positive integer number of bits.
  • the third information is carried by a downlink physical layer control channel.
  • the third information is carried by a PDCCH.
  • the third information is carried by the sPDCCH.
  • the third information is carried by the NR-PDCCH.
  • the third information is carried by the NB-PDCCH.
  • the third information indicates a transmission power of the M1 reference signals.
  • the transmit power of the M1 reference signals is one of a plurality of candidate transmit powers.
  • the third information indicates whether the transmit power of the M1 reference signals and the transmit power of the M reference signals are the same.
  • the fourth information is semi-statically configured.
  • the fourth information is carried by higher layer signaling.
  • the fourth information is carried by RRC signaling.
  • the fourth information is all or a part of an IE in one RRC signaling.
  • the fourth information is carried by MAC CE signaling.
  • the fourth information is transmitted in the SIB.
  • the fourth information explicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the fourth information implicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S sub-antenna port sets.
  • the fourth information explicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources are respectively in one-to-one correspondence with the S sub-antenna port sets.
  • the fourth information implicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources are respectively in one-to-one correspondence with the S sub-antenna port sets.
  • the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets include the N1 antenna port groups.
  • the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets are composed of the N1 antenna port groups.
  • the K is equal to 1, and the first information is used to determine the N1 antenna port groups from the K antenna port sets.
  • the K is greater than 1, and the first information is used to determine, from the set of K antenna ports, a set of antenna ports to which the N1 antenna port groups belong.
  • the K is equal to 1
  • the M1 reference signals and the transmit antenna port group of the M reference signals belong to the K antenna port set
  • the first information is used from the K
  • the transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals and the transmit antenna port group of the M reference signals are determined in the set of antenna ports.
  • the K is greater than 1, and the transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals belong to a same one of the K antenna port sets, the first information. Used to determine the same set of antenna ports from the set of K antenna ports.
  • the K is greater than 1, and the transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals belong to different antenna port sets in the K antenna port set, the first information.
  • An antenna port set to which the transmit antenna port group to which the M reference signals belong and the set of antenna ports to which the transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals belong is determined from the K antenna port sets.
  • the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets include the Q antenna port groups.
  • the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets are composed of the Q antenna port groups.
  • the transmission power of the wireless signals transmitted on any two of the K antenna port sets is the same.
  • the transmission power of the wireless signals transmitted on at least two of the K antenna port sets is the same.
  • the transmission power of the wireless signals transmitted on any two antenna port groups in the one of the K antenna port sets is the same.
  • Embodiment 6 illustrates a flow chart of another wireless transmission, as shown in FIG.
  • base station N03 is a serving cell maintenance base station of user equipment U04.
  • blocks F4, F5, F6 and F7 are optional.
  • the second information is transmitted in step S30; the first information is transmitted in step S31; the fourth information is transmitted in step S32; the M reference signals are received in step S33; the fifth information is transmitted in step S34; The third information is transmitted in step S35; the M1 reference signals are received in step S36.
  • the second information is received in step S40; the first information is received in step S41; the fourth information is received in step S42; the first access detection is performed in step S43; and M reference signals are transmitted in step S44.
  • the first information is used by the U04 to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first subband, the N being a positive integer greater than one; the U04 performing a first access detection, Determining M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols; for the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, transmitting M references respectively in only the M multi-carrier symbols Signals; the M reference signals are used by the N03 to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated by the N03 to N1 antenna port groups The M reference signals are sent by the U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups, where M is a positive integer not greater than the N, and the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M.
  • the N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N. Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in the M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, and transmitting power of any one of the M1 reference signals and any one of the M reference signals The transmission power is the same, at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols after that.
  • the second information is used by the U04 to determine a set of K antenna ports, the K Is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to the K antenna ports One of the collections.
  • the third information is used by the U04 to determine that the transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, the third information.
  • the reception is prior to the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
  • the fourth information is used by the U04 to determine that the S candidate air interface resources in the present application respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups in the present application.
  • the fifth information is used by the U04 to determine N3 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, the N3 is a positive integer greater than 1; the U04 performs a second access detection, and determines the N3 M1 multi-carrier symbols in the multi-carrier symbols; wherein the execution of the second access detection precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals; for the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the user equipment is only in the Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in the M1 multicarrier symbols; the M1 reference signals are used by the N03 to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols, where the M1 is Not more than a positive integer of the N3.
  • the foregoing method includes: performing second access detection, determining M1 multi-carrier symbols in N3 multi-carrier symbols;
  • the performing of the second access detection precedes the sending of the M1 reference signals; the first information is used to determine the N3 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, the N3 Is a positive integer greater than 1; for the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the user equipment transmits M1 reference signals only in the M1 multi-carrier symbols therein; the M1 reference signals are used for The M1 multicarrier symbols are determined in the N3 multicarrier symbols, and the M1 is a positive integer not greater than the N3.
  • the N3 is equal to the N.
  • the N3 is not equal to the N.
  • the N multicarrier symbols and the N3 multicarrier symbols belong to two uplink bursts, respectively.
  • the method includes: receiving fifth information, where the fifth information is used to determine N3 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, the N3 being a positive integer greater than one;
  • the performing of the second access detection is preceded by the sending of the M1 reference signals; for the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the user equipment sends the M1 only in the M1 multi-carrier symbols.
  • Reference signals; the M1 reference signals are used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols, the M1 being a positive integer not greater than the N3.
  • the N3 multicarrier symbols are allocated to Q antenna port groups; the M1 reference signals are sent by Q1 antenna port groups in the Q antenna port groups, the M1 reference signals At least one reference signal is transmitted by the same antenna port group in the Q1 antenna port group, the Q1 is a positive integer not greater than the M1, and the Q is a positive integer not greater than the N3.
  • the Q antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the K is equal to 1, and the fifth information is used to determine the Q antenna port groups from the K antenna port sets.
  • the K is greater than 1, and the fifth information is used to determine, from the set of K antenna ports, an antenna port set to which the Q antenna port groups belong.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information, that is, the first information and the fifth information are information that are sent by the same DCI format at different times.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the first information and the fifth information are respectively sent by a domain in the same DCI format at different times. Information.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the K is equal to 1, and the first information and the fifth information are both determined from the set of K antenna ports. Port group.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the K is greater than 1, and the first information and the fifth information are both determined from the set of K antenna ports. Port collection.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information, that is, the sending time of the fifth information and the first information belong to a first time window.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the sending time of the M1 reference signals corresponding to the fifth information is the M reference corresponding to the first information.
  • the transmission time of the signal belongs to the first time window.
  • the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the fifth information and the first information correspond to the same measurement process, and the sending of the M1 reference signals and the M The transmission of the reference signals is for the same measurement process.
  • the same measurement process is Beam Management and/or channel estimation.
  • the end time of execution of the second access detection is before the start time of the N3 multicarrier symbols.
  • the end time of execution of the second access detection is before the start time of the M1 multicarrier symbols.
  • the second access detection is used to determine that only the M1 multicarrier symbols of the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
  • the M1 reference signals are used by a receiver of the M1 reference signals to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols, where the M1 is not greater than the N3 Positive integer.
  • the M1 reference signals are all used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
  • a portion of the M1 reference signals are used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
  • a first one of the M1 reference signals is used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
  • one of the M1 reference signals is used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
  • the given reference signal is predefined.
  • the given reference signal is configured by higher layer signaling.
  • the given reference signal is configured by physical layer signaling.
  • Embodiments 7A to 7E respectively illustrate schematic diagrams of the relationship of one N multicarrier symbols, N1 antenna port groups, and M reference signals.
  • the N multicarrier symbols in the present application are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals are transmitted by U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups.
  • M is a positive integer not greater than the N
  • the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M
  • the N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
  • any one of the N1 antenna port groups corresponds to at least one of the N multicarrier symbols, and any one of the N multicarrier symbols corresponds to the One of N1 antenna port groups, the N1 is not less than the N2 and is not greater than a positive integer of the N.
  • the N1 is equal to the N, and the N multicarrier symbols are respectively allocated to the N1 antenna port groups.
  • the N1 is equal to 1, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to the same antenna port group.
  • the N1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and at least two consecutive multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols are allocated to the same one of the N1 antenna port groups.
  • the U1 is equal to the M, and the M reference signals are respectively sent by the U1 antenna port group.
  • the U1 is equal to 1, and the M reference signals are sent by the same antenna port group, where the N The multicarrier symbols are contiguous in the time domain.
  • the U1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the M, and at least two of the M reference signals occupy a continuous multicarrier symbol in the time domain, and are referenced by the U1 antenna port group.
  • An antenna port group is sent.
  • the embodiment 7A corresponds to the relationship that the N1 is equal to the N, and the U1 is equal to the relationship between the N multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals of the M.
  • the embodiment 7B corresponds to a schematic diagram of a relationship between N multi-carrier symbols, N1 antenna port groups, and M reference signals, where the N1 is equal to 1.
  • the embodiment 7C corresponds to the relationship that the N1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and the U1 is equal to the relationship between the N multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals of the M. .
  • the embodiment 7D corresponds to a relationship between the N multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals, where the N1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and the U1 is equal to 1.
  • the embodiment 7E corresponds to the N1 being greater than 1 and smaller than the N, the U1 being greater than 1 and smaller than the M multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port group, and the M reference signals. Schematic diagram of the relationship.
  • Embodiments 8A to 8E respectively illustrate schematic diagrams of the relationship of one N3 multicarrier symbols, Q antenna port groups, and M1 reference signals.
  • the N3 multicarrier symbols in the present application are allocated to Q antenna port groups; the M1 reference signals are transmitted by Q1 antenna port groups in the Q antenna port groups, At least one of the M1 reference signals is transmitted by the same antenna port group in the Q1 antenna port group, the Q1 is a positive integer not greater than the M1, and the Q is not greater than the N3 A positive integer.
  • any one of the Q antenna port groups corresponds to at least one of the N3 multicarrier symbols, and any one of the N3 multicarrier symbols corresponds to the One of the Q antenna port groups, the Q is not less than the P1 and is not greater than a positive integer of the N3.
  • the Q is equal to the N3, and the N3 multicarrier symbols are respectively allocated to the Q antenna port groups.
  • the Q is equal to 1, and the N3 multicarrier symbols are allocated to the same antenna port group.
  • the Q is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and at least two consecutive multi-carrier symbols of the N3 multi-carrier symbols are allocated to the same one of the Q antenna port groups.
  • the Q1 is equal to the M1, and the M1 reference signals are respectively sent by Q1 antenna port groups.
  • the Q1 is equal to 1, and the M1 reference signals are transmitted by the same antenna port group, and the N3 multi-carrier symbols are continuous in the time domain.
  • the Q1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the M1, and at least two reference signals occupying consecutive multi-carrier symbols in the time domain are the same in the Q1 antenna port group.
  • An antenna port group is sent.
  • the embodiment 8A corresponds to the Q being equal to the N3, and the Q1 is equal to a relationship between the N3 multi-carrier symbols of the M1, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals.
  • the embodiment 8B corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the Q is equal to 1, and the Q1 is equal to 1 for N3 multi-carrier symbols, Q antenna port groups, and M1 reference signals.
  • the embodiment 8C corresponds to the relationship that the Q is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and the Q1 is equal to the relationship between the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals of the M1. .
  • the embodiment 8D corresponds to a schematic diagram of a relationship between the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals, where the Q is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and the Q1 is equal to 1.
  • the embodiment 8E corresponds to the Q being greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, where the Q1 is greater than 1 and less than the N3 multicarrier symbols of the M1, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals. Schematic diagram of the relationship.
  • Embodiment 9 exemplifies a relationship of M1 reference signals and M reference signals, as shown in FIG.
  • the transmission power of any one of the M1 reference signals in the present application is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one of the reference signals is not described.
  • the multi-carrier symbol occupied by the user equipment, the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and after the M multi-carrier symbols.
  • the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals are transmitted by the same antenna port group.
  • the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals are transmitted by different antenna port groups.
  • At least one of the M1 reference signals and any one of the M reference signals are transmitted by different antenna port groups.
  • At least one of the M1 reference signals and at least one of the M reference signals are transmitted by the same antenna port group.
  • the transmission times of the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals all belong to a first time window.
  • the uplink reference signals belonging to the first time window have the same transmission power, and the uplink reference signal includes the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals.
  • the first time window includes a plurality of multi-carrier symbols in the time domain.
  • the first time window includes a plurality of slots in the time domain.
  • the first time window includes a plurality of uplink bursts in the time domain.
  • the first time window is predefined.
  • the first time window is configured by higher layer signaling.
  • the first time window is configured by physical layer signaling.
  • the transmission of the M1 reference signals and the transmission of the M reference signals are all for the same measurement process.
  • the same measurement process is Beam Management and/or channel estimation.
  • the transmission time of the M1 reference signals and the transmission time of the M reference signals belong to two uplink bursts (UL bursts), respectively.
  • an upstream burst consists of a set of consecutive multi-carrier symbols.
  • the user equipment transmits a wireless signal in an uplink burst.
  • the user equipment transmits a wireless signal on each multi-carrier symbol in an uplink burst.
  • the two upstream bursts are orthogonal in the time domain.
  • the two uplink bursts are separated by at least one multi-carrier symbol in the time domain.
  • Embodiment 10 illustrates a schematic diagram in which one M reference signals are used to determine M multicarrier symbols from N multicarrier symbols, as shown in FIG.
  • the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group in the present application are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine the M multi-carrier symbols from the N multi-carrier symbols.
  • the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate air interface resources Separately used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups being composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, the S Is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are implicitly determined by the receivers of the M reference signals from the N multicarrier symbols.
  • the target reference signal group includes the M reference signals.
  • the target reference signal group includes a partial reference signal of the M reference signals.
  • the target reference signal group includes a first one of the M reference signals.
  • the target reference signal group includes the last one of the M reference signals.
  • the target reference signal group includes one of the M reference signals for a given reference signal.
  • the given reference signal is predefined.
  • the given reference signal is configured by higher layer signaling.
  • the given reference signal is configured by physical layer signaling.
  • the air interface resource includes at least one of ⁇ time domain resource, frequency domain resource, and code domain resource ⁇ .
  • the air interface resource is a time domain resource.
  • the air interface resource is a frequency domain resource.
  • the air interface resource is a code domain resource.
  • the code domain resource refers to: the occupied feature sequence is one of a plurality of candidate feature sequences.
  • the code domain resource refers to an index of the occupied feature sequence in multiple candidate feature sequences.
  • the S multi-carrier symbol groups include different numbers of multi-carrier symbols.
  • the multi-carrier symbols included in the S multi-carrier symbol groups are different from each other.
  • two identical multi-carrier symbol groups are not included in the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • any two of the S multi-carrier symbol groups include at least one different multi-carrier symbol.
  • any two of the S multi-carrier symbol groups do not include the same multi-carrier symbol.
  • the S multi-carrier symbol groups are respectively allocated to the S sub-antenna port sets, and the S candidate air interface resources are respectively in one-to-one correspondence with the S sub-antenna port sets.
  • the S sub-antenna port sets belong to the same one of the K antenna port sets, and any one of the S sub-antenna port sets includes one or more antenna port groups. .
  • any one of the S antenna antenna port sets includes one or more antenna port groups, and all of the S antenna antenna port groups belong to the N1 antenna port group. .
  • the M multicarrier symbols belong to one of the S multicarrier symbol groups.
  • the M multi-carrier symbols belong to one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups corresponding to the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group.
  • the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine one multi-carrier symbol group from the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the U1 antenna port group belongs to one of the S sub-antenna port sets.
  • the U1 antenna port group belongs to one of the S sub-antenna port sets corresponding to the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group.
  • the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine a set of sub-antenna ports from the set of S sub-antenna ports.
  • the one-to-one correspondence between the S candidate air interface resources and the S multi-carrier symbol groups is predefined.
  • Embodiments 11A to 11B respectively illustrate a schematic diagram of a relationship between a first access detection and N1 antenna port groups.
  • the first access detection in the application includes N2 access detection, and any one of the N2 access detections is used to determine the N multi-carrier symbols. Whether at least one multi-carrier symbol can be used for uplink transmission, and whether any one of the N multi-carrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission is determined by one of the N2 access detections, N2 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
  • the end time of execution of the first access detection is before the start time of the N multicarrier symbols.
  • the end time of execution of the first access detection is before the start time of the M multi-carrier symbols.
  • the first access detection is used to determine that only the M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
  • the N2 is equal to the N, and the N2 access detections are respectively used to determine whether the N multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
  • the N2 is equal to 1, and the N2 access detection is used to determine whether the N multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
  • the N2 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and one of the N2 access detections is used to determine whether at least two multicarrier symbols of the N multicarrier symbols can be used. Send upstream.
  • the multiple antenna related receptions of the N2 access detection are different from each other.
  • the multi-antenna related transmission of the N1 antenna port groups is related to the multi-antenna related reception of the N2 access detection.
  • the N1 is equal to the N2, and the multiple antenna related transmissions of the N1 antenna port groups are respectively used to determine the multi-antenna related reception of the N2 access detection.
  • the N1 is equal to the N2, and the multiple antenna related reception of the N2 access detection includes multiple antenna related transmissions of the N1 antenna port groups, respectively.
  • the N1 is equal to the N2, and the multiple antenna related transmissions of the N1 antenna port groups are respectively the same as the multiple antennas related to the N2 access detection.
  • the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multiple antenna-related reception of the N2 access detection is determined by multi-antenna-related transmission of at least one of the N1 antenna port groups.
  • the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of any one of the N2 access detections includes multiple antennas of at least one of the N1 antenna port groups. Related to send.
  • the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of any one of the N2 access detections and the multi-antenna of at least one of the N1 antenna port groups The related send is the same.
  • the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection in the N2 access detection is performed by at least two antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port group. Antenna related transmission determination.
  • the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection in the N2 access detection includes a plurality of at least two antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port group. Antenna related transmission.
  • the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection and the at least two antenna port groups of the N1 antenna port group are the N2 access detection.
  • the antenna related transmission is the same.
  • the one-time access detection is used to determine if the first sub-band is idle (Idle).
  • the one-time access detection is used to determine whether uplink transmission may be performed on the first sub-band using the same multi-antenna related transmission associated with the multi-antenna of the one-time access detection.
  • the multi-antenna related reception is a spatial Rx parameter.
  • the multi-antenna related reception is a receive beam.
  • the multi-antenna related reception is a receive beamforming matrix.
  • the multi-antenna related reception is a receive analog beam shaping matrix.
  • the multi-antenna related reception is a receive beamforming vector.
  • the multi-antenna related reception is receive spatial filtering.
  • the multi-antenna related transmission is a spatial transmission parameter (Spatial Tx parameters).
  • the multi-antenna related transmission is a transmit beam.
  • the multi-antenna related transmission is a transmit beam shaping matrix.
  • the multi-antenna related transmission is to transmit an analog beamforming matrix.
  • the multi-antenna related transmission is a transmit beamforming vector.
  • the multi-antenna related transmission is transmission spatial filtering.
  • the embodiment 11A corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the N2 is equal to the relationship between the first access detection of the N1 and the N1 antenna port groups.
  • the embodiment 11B corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the N2 is smaller than the relationship between the first access detection of the N1 and the N1 antenna port groups.
  • Embodiments 12A through 12B respectively illustrate schematic diagrams of a given access detection and spatial relationship of a given wireless signal.
  • the given access detection corresponds to one access detection in the first access detection or the second access detection in the present application
  • the given wireless signal and the present application At least one of the M reference signals or at least one of the M1 reference signals corresponds to.
  • the multi-antenna related reception used by the given access detection can be used to infer multi-antenna related transmission of the given wireless signal.
  • the multi-antenna related reception used by the given access detection is the same as the multi-antenna related transmission of the given wireless signal.
  • the multi-antenna related reception used by the given access detection is different from the multi-antenna related transmission of the given wireless signal.
  • a beamwidth corresponding to a receive beamforming matrix used by a given access detection is greater than a beamwidth corresponding to a transmit beamforming matrix of the given wireless signal.
  • the beam direction corresponding to the receive beamforming matrix used by the given access detection includes a beam direction corresponding to a transmit beamforming matrix of the given wireless signal.
  • the beam width corresponding to the received beam used by the given access detection is greater than the beam width corresponding to the transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
  • the receive beam used by the given access detection includes a transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
  • the number of antennas used for a given access detection is less than the number of transmit antennas for the given wireless signal.
  • the number of antennas used for the given access detection is greater than one.
  • the number of antennas used for the given access detection is equal to one.
  • the number of transmit antennas for a given wireless signal is greater than one.
  • the embodiment 12A corresponds to the same schematic diagram of the receive beam used by the given access detection and the transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
  • the embodiment 12B corresponds to a schematic diagram of a transmit beam used by the given access detection including a transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
  • Embodiment 13 illustrates a schematic diagram of an antenna port and an antenna port group, as shown in FIG.
  • one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; one antenna port is formed by superposition of antennas in a positive integer number of antenna groups by antenna virtualization; one antenna group includes a positive integer antenna.
  • An antenna group is connected to the baseband processor through an RF (Radio Frequency) chain, and different antenna groups correspond to different RF chains.
  • a mapping coefficient of all antennas within a positive integer number of antenna groups included in a given antenna port to the given antenna port constitutes a beamforming vector corresponding to the given antenna port.
  • the mapping coefficients of the plurality of antennas included in any given antenna group included in a given integer number of antenna groups included in the given antenna port to the given antenna port constitute an analog beamforming vector of the given antenna group.
  • the diagonal arrangement of the analog beamforming vectors corresponding to the positive integer antenna groups constitutes an analog beam shaping matrix corresponding to the given antenna port.
  • the mapping coefficients of the positive integer antenna group to the given antenna port constitute a digital beam assignment corresponding to the given antenna port Type vector.
  • the beamforming vector corresponding to the given antenna port is obtained by multiplying the analog beam shaping matrix and the digital beam shaping vector corresponding to the given antenna port.
  • Different antenna ports in one antenna port group are composed of the same antenna group, and different antenna ports in the same antenna port group correspond to different beamforming vectors.
  • antenna port group #0 and antenna port group #1 Two antenna port groups are shown in Figure 13: antenna port group #0 and antenna port group #1.
  • the antenna port group #0 is composed of an antenna group #0
  • the antenna port group #1 is composed of an antenna group #1 and an antenna group #2.
  • the mapping coefficients of the plurality of antennas in the antenna group #0 to the antenna port group #0 constitute an analog beamforming vector #0
  • the mapping coefficients of the antenna group #0 to the antenna port group #0 constitute a number Beamforming vector #0
  • the mapping coefficients of the plurality of antennas in the antenna group #1 and the plurality of antennas in the antenna group #2 to the antenna port group #1 constitute an analog beamforming vector #1 and an analog beamforming vector #, respectively. 2.
  • the mapping coefficients of the antenna group #1 and the antenna group #2 to the antenna port group #1 constitute a digital beamforming vector #1.
  • a beamforming vector corresponding to any one of the antenna port groups #0 is obtained by multiplying the analog beamforming vector #0 and the digital beamforming vector #0.
  • the beamforming vector corresponding to any antenna port in the antenna port group #1 is an analog beam shaping matrix formed by diagonally arranging the analog beamforming vector #1 and the analog beamforming vector #2 Obtained from the product of the digital beamforming vector #1.
  • one antenna port group includes one antenna port.
  • the antenna port group #0 in FIG. 13 includes one antenna port.
  • the analog beamforming matrix corresponding to the one antenna port is reduced into an analog beamforming vector, and the digital beamforming vector corresponding to the one antenna port is reduced to a scalar.
  • the beamforming vector corresponding to one antenna port is equal to the analog beamforming vector corresponding to the one antenna port.
  • the digital beamforming vector #0 in FIG. 13 is reduced to a scalar, and the beamforming vector corresponding to the antenna port in the antenna port group #0 is the analog beamforming vector #0.
  • one antenna port group includes a plurality of antenna ports.
  • the antenna port group #1 in FIG. 13 includes a plurality of antenna ports.
  • the plurality of antenna ports correspond to the same analog beam shaping matrix.
  • At least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to the same analog beam shaping matrix.
  • At least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to different analog beam shaping matrices.
  • the plurality of antenna ports correspond to different digital beamforming vectors.
  • At least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to the same digital beamforming vector.
  • At least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to different digital beamforming vectors.
  • any two antenna ports of different antenna port groups correspond to different analog beam shaping matrices.
  • At least two of the different antenna port groups correspond to different analog beam shaping matrices.
  • At least two of the different antenna port groups correspond to the same analog beam shaping matrix.
  • two different antenna port groups are QCL (Quasi Co-Located).
  • two different antenna port groups are not QCLs.
  • any two of the antenna port groups are QCLs.
  • any two of the antenna port groups are not QCL.
  • At least two of the antenna port groups are QCLs.
  • At least two of the antenna port groups are not QCL.
  • any two of the antenna port groups are spatial QCLs.
  • any two antenna ports in an antenna port group are not spatial QCLs.
  • At least two of the antenna port groups are spatial QCLs.
  • At least two of the antenna port groups are not spatial QCLs.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are QCL means that all or part of the large-scale properties of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports can be inferred. All or part of the large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the antenna ports.
  • the two antenna ports being QCL means that the two antenna ports have at least one identical QCL parameter, and the QCL parameters include multiple antenna related QCL parameters and multiple antenna independent QCL parameters. .
  • the two antenna ports being QCL means that at least one QCL of the other of the two antenna ports can be inferred from at least one QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. parameter.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on antenna ports.
  • the two antenna ports being QCL means that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on antenna ports.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports.
  • Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on an antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another antenna port of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal sent on is the same.
  • the fact that two antenna ports are not QCL means that all or part of the large-scale nature of the wireless signal transmitted from one of the two antenna ports cannot be inferred. All or part of the large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the two antenna ports.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the two antenna ports have at least one different QCL parameter, and the QCL parameters include multiple antenna related QCL parameters and multiple antenna independent QCL parameters. .
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that at least one of the two antenna ports cannot be inferred from at least one QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. QCL parameters.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred to be another of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred to be another of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred to be another of the two antenna ports.
  • Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on one antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another antenna of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal sent on the port is the same.
  • the multi-antenna related QCL parameters include: ⁇ one of angle of arrival, angle of departure, spatial correlation, multi-antenna related transmission, multi-antenna related reception ⁇ Or a variety.
  • the multi-antenna-independent QCL parameters include: ⁇ delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, path loss, average gain One or more of (average gain) ⁇ .
  • the two antenna ports are spatial QCL refers to all or part of a multi-antenna related large-scale characteristic of a wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports ( Properties) Inferring all or part of the multi-antenna-related large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the two antenna ports.
  • the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the two antenna ports have at least one identical multi-antenna related QCL parameter.
  • the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the other of the two antenna ports can be inferred from at least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. At least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of the antenna port.
  • the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
  • the two antenna ports are spatial QCL means that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
  • the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports.
  • Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on one antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another antenna of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal sent on the port is the same.
  • the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL refers to all or part of the multi-antenna related large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports. (properties) Inferring all or part of the multi-antenna-related large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the two antenna ports.
  • the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, which means that the two antenna ports have at least one different multi-antenna related QCL parameter.
  • the fact that the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL means that one of the two antenna ports cannot be inferred from at least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. At least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of an antenna port.
  • the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, meaning that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred from the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on another antenna port.
  • the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, meaning that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred from the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on another antenna port.
  • the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, meaning that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred from the two antenna ports.
  • Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on another antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal transmitted on the antenna port is the same.
  • the multi-element related large-scale characteristics of a given wireless signal include ⁇ angle of arrival, angle of departure, spatial correlation, multi-antenna related transmission, multi-antenna related reception One or more of ⁇ .
  • Embodiments 14A to 14B respectively illustrate a schematic diagram of a relationship between a second access detection and Q antenna port groups.
  • the second access detection in the application includes P1 access detection, and any one of the P1 access detections is used to determine the N3 multicarrier symbols. Whether at least one multi-carrier symbol can be used for uplink transmission, and whether any one of the N3 multi-carrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission is determined by one of the P1 access detections, P1 is a positive integer not greater than the N3.
  • the P1 is equal to the N3, and the P1 access detection is respectively used to determine whether the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
  • the P1 is equal to 1, and the P1 access detection is used to determine whether the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
  • the P1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and one of the P1 access detections is used to determine whether at least two multicarrier symbols of the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used. Send upstream.
  • the multiple antenna related receptions of the P1 access detection are different from each other.
  • the multi-antenna related transmission of the Q antenna port groups is related to the reception of the multi-antenna related to the P1 access detection.
  • the Q is equal to the P1, and the multiple antenna related transmissions of the Q antenna port groups are respectively used to determine the multi-antenna related reception of the P1 access detection.
  • the Q is equal to the P1
  • the multi-antenna related reception of the P1 access detection includes multiple antenna-related transmissions of the Q antenna port groups, respectively.
  • the Q is equal to the P1, and the multiple antenna-related transmissions of the Q antenna port groups are respectively the same as the multiple antenna-related receptions of the P1 access detection.
  • the Q is greater than the P1
  • the multi-antenna related reception of the P1 access detection is determined by multi-antenna related transmission of at least one of the Q antenna port groups.
  • the Q is greater than the P1
  • the multi-antenna related reception of any one of the P1 access detections includes multiple antennas of at least one of the Q antenna port groups. Related to send.
  • the Q is greater than the P1, and multiple antenna-related receptions of any one of the P1 access detections and multiple antennas of at least one of the Q antenna port groups are received.
  • the related send is the same.
  • the Q is greater than the P1
  • the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection in the P1 access detection is performed by at least two antenna port groups in the Q antenna port group. Antenna related transmission determination.
  • the Q is greater than the P1
  • the multi-antenna related reception of the access detection at least one of the P1 access detections includes at least two antenna port groups of the Q antenna port groups. Antenna related transmission.
  • the Q is greater than the P1, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection and the at least two antenna port groups of the Q antenna port group are the P1 access detection.
  • the antenna related transmission is the same.
  • the embodiment 14A corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the P1 is equal to the relationship between the second access detection of the Q and the Q antenna port groups.
  • the embodiment 14B corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the P1 is smaller than the relationship between the second access detection of the Q and the Q antenna port groups.
  • Embodiments 15A to 15C respectively illustrate a schematic diagram of one-time access detection.
  • the one-time access detection in the present application includes: performing T energy detections in T time sub-pools respectively, to obtain T detection values; wherein, T1 of the T detection values The detected values are all lower than the first threshold; the T is a positive integer, and the T1 is a positive integer not greater than the T.
  • the primary access detection is an LBT, and the specific definition and implementation manner of the LBT are described. 3GPP TR36.889.
  • the one-time access detection is a CCA (Clear Channel Assessment), and the specific definition and implementation manner of the CCA is referred to 3GPP TR36.889.
  • CCA Carrier Channel Assessment
  • the one-time access detection is uplink access detection.
  • the one-time access detection is implemented in the manner defined by Section 15.2 of 3GPP TS 36.213.
  • the T1 is equal to the T.
  • the T1 is smaller than the T.
  • the units of the T detection values and the first threshold are both dBm (millimeters).
  • the units of the T detection values and the first threshold are both milliwatts (mW).
  • the unit of the T detection values and the first threshold is Joule.
  • the first threshold is equal to or less than -72 dBm.
  • the first threshold is any value equal to or smaller than the first given value.
  • the first threshold is freely selected by the user equipment under conditions equal to or less than a first given value.
  • the first given value is predefined.
  • the first given value is configured by higher layer signaling.
  • At least one of the detected values that do not belong to the T1 detection values among the T detection values is lower than the first threshold.
  • the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs is the first sub-band.
  • the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs is a BWP.
  • the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs is a carrier.
  • the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs includes a group of consecutive RBs.
  • the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs includes a set of consecutive PRBs.
  • the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs includes a set of consecutive sub-carriers.
  • the T detection values are respectively the power of the user equipment to sense (Sense) all wireless signals in the T time units in the frequency domain resource blocks to which the first sub-band belongs, and in time Up-averaging, the received power obtained; the T time units are each one of the T time sub-pools.
  • the duration of any one of the T time units is not shorter than 4 microseconds.
  • the T detection values are energy that the user equipment senses all wireless signals in the T time units in the frequency domain resource blocks to which the first sub-band belongs, and in time Up-averaging, the received energy obtained; the T time units are each one of the T time sub-pools.
  • the multiple access detections used in the T time pools are all the same, and the T detection values are respectively used by the user equipment in the T time units.
  • any given energy detection in the T-th energy detection means that the user equipment monitors received power in a given time unit, and the given time unit is the T time sub-pools. Neutating a duration period in the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
  • any given energy detection in the T-th energy detection means that the user equipment monitors received energy in a given time unit, and the given time unit is the T time sub-pools. Neutating a duration period in the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
  • any given energy detection in the T-th power detection refers to: all the wireless signals on the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs in the given time unit. Perceive (Sense) to obtain a given power; the given time unit is one of the T time subpools and the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
  • the detected value corresponding to the given energy detection in the T detection values is the given power.
  • any given energy detection in the T-th power detection refers to: all the wireless signals on the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs in the given time unit. Sense is performed to obtain a given energy; the given time unit is one of the T time subpools and the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
  • the detected value corresponding to the given energy detection in the T detection values is the given energy.
  • the multiple access detections used in the T time pools are all the same, and the T detection values are respectively used by the user equipment in the T time units.
  • any given energy detection in the T-th power detection refers to: the user equipment receives the frequency associated with the first sub-band with a given multi-antenna correlation in a given time unit. All wireless signals on the domain resource block are Senseed to obtain a given power or given energy; the given time unit is a time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection in the T time subpools One of the durations in the middle.
  • the detected value corresponding to the given energy detection in the T detection values is the given power or a given energy.
  • the primary access detection is the same for multiple antenna-related receptions used on T time sub-pools, and the multiple antenna-related reception is the given multiple antenna-related reception.
  • any one of the T-th energy measurements is implemented by means defined in section 15 of 3GPP TS 36.213.
  • any one of the T-th energy detections is implemented by an energy detection method in the LTE LAA.
  • any one of the T-th energy detections is energy detection during the LBT process.
  • any one of the T-th energy measurements is energy detection during the CCA process.
  • any one of the T-th energy detections is implemented by an energy detection method in WiFi.
  • any one of the T-th energy detections is performed by measuring RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
  • the time domain resources occupied by any one of the T time subpools are consecutive.
  • the T time subpools are orthogonal to each other (non-overlapping) in the time domain.
  • the duration of any of the T time subpools is one of ⁇ 16 microseconds, 9 microseconds ⁇ .
  • At least two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools have unequal durations.
  • the durations of any two of the T time subpools are equal.
  • the time domain resources occupied by the T time subpools are continuous.
  • the time domain resources occupied by at least two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools are discontinuous.
  • the time domain resources occupied by any two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools are discontinuous.
  • any one of the T time subpools is a slot.
  • any one of the T time subpools is T sl , and the T sl is a slot duration, and the specific definition of the T sl is as described in 3GPP TS 36.213. Section 15.2.
  • any time sub-pool other than the earliest time sub-pool in the T time sub-pools is a slot.
  • any one of the T time subpools except the earliest time subpool is T sl , and the T sl is a slot duration, and the T sl is specific. See Section 15.2 of 3GPP TS 36.213 for definitions.
  • At least one time sub-pool having a duration of 16 microseconds exists in the T time sub-pools.
  • At least one time sub-pool having a duration of 9 microseconds exists in the T time sub-pools.
  • the earliest time sub-pool of the T time sub-pools has a duration of 16 microseconds.
  • the last time subpool of the T time subpools has a duration of 9 microseconds.
  • the T time subpools include a listening time in a Cat 4 (fourth class) LBT.
  • the T time subpools include time slots in a Defer Duration in a Cat 4 (fourth class) LBT and time slots in a back-off time.
  • the T time subpools include a listening time in a Cat 2 (second class) LBT.
  • the T time sub-pools include a time slot and a back-off time (Back-off) in a Defer Duration in a Type 1 UL channel access procedure. Time slot in Time).
  • the T time subpools include time slots in a sensing interval in a Type 2 UL channel access procedure, the specific time interval of the sensing time interval See Section 15.2 of 3GPP TS 36.213 for definitions.
  • the duration of the sensing time interval is 25 microseconds.
  • the T time subpools include T f and T sl in a sensing interval in a Type 2 UL channel access procedure, the T f And the T sl is two time intervals, and the specific definition of the T f and the T sl is referred to the section 15.2 in 3GPP TS 36.213.
  • the duration of the Tf is 16 microseconds.
  • the duration of the T sl is 9 microseconds.
  • the T time subpools include time slots in an initial CCA and an eCCA (Enhanced Clear Channel Assessment).
  • eCCA Enhanced Clear Channel Assessment
  • the durations of any two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pools are equal, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools. Time subpool.
  • the durations of at least two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pools are not equal, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools. Time subpool.
  • the time domain resources occupied by the T1 time sub-pools are consecutive, and the T1 time sub-pools are time sub-pools corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools.
  • the time domain resources occupied by at least two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pools are discontinuous, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively the T1 time sub-pools and the T1 The time subpool corresponding to the detected value.
  • the time domain resources occupied by any two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pool are discontinuous, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively detected in the T time sub-pools and the T1 detections.
  • the time subpool corresponding to the value.
  • the T1 time sub-pools include the latest time sub-pools of the T time sub-pools, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively the T1 time sub-pools and the T1 The time subpool corresponding to the detected value.
  • the T1 time sub-pools only include time slots in the eCCA, and the T1 time sub-pools are time sub-pools corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools.
  • the T time sub-pools include T1 time sub-pools and T2 time sub-pools, where the T1 time sub-pools are respectively corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools Time sub-pool, the T2 The sub-pool of any time in the time sub-pool does not belong to the T1 time sub-pool; the T2 is a positive integer not greater than the T minus the T1.
  • the positions of the T2 time subpools in the T time subpools are continuous.
  • the T2 time subpools include time slots in the initial CCA.
  • the T1 time sub-pools are time sub-pools corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools, and the T1 time sub-pools respectively belong to T1 sub-pool sets, and the T1 Any one of the sub-pool pools includes a positive integer number of time sub-pools in the T time pools; and the detected value corresponding to any one of the T1 sub-pool pools is smaller than the first threshold. .
  • the number of time sub-pools included in the at least one sub-pool set in the T1 sub-pool set is equal to 1.
  • At least one sub-pool set in the T1 sub-pool set includes a number of time sub-pools greater than one.
  • the number of time sub-pools included in the at least two sub-pool sets in the T1 sub-pool set is unequal.
  • one time sub-pool does not exist in the T time sub-pools and belongs to two sub-pool sets in the T1 sub-pool set.
  • all time sub-pools in the at least one sub-pool set in the T1 sub-pool set belong to the same delay period (Defer Duration).
  • the duration of a Defer Duration is 16 microseconds plus a positive integer of 9 microseconds.
  • the detected value corresponding to at least one time sub-pool in the time sub-pool that does not belong to the T1 sub-pool set in the T time sub-pools is smaller than the first threshold.
  • the time domain resource occupied by the T time pools in the embodiment 15A is a schematic diagram of consecutive access detection.
  • the embodiment 15B corresponds to a time-domain resource occupied by at least two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools, which is a discontinuous one-time access detection.
  • the time domain resource occupied by any two time sub-pools in the T time pools is a schematic diagram of a discontinuous access detection.
  • Embodiment 16 exemplifies a structural block diagram of a processing device in one UE, as shown in FIG.
  • the UE processing apparatus 1200 is mainly composed of a first receiver module 1201 and a first transmitter module 1202.
  • a first receiver module 1201 receiving first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one; performing a first access detection Determining M multicarrier symbols in the N multicarrier symbols;
  • a first transmitter module 1202 for the N multicarrier symbols on the first subband, transmitting M reference signals respectively in only the M multicarrier symbols therein.
  • the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, Said M reference signals are transmitted by U1 antenna port groups in said N1 antenna port groups, said M being a positive integer not greater than said N, said U1 being a positive integer not greater than said M, said N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
  • the first transmitter module 1202 further transmits M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband; wherein any one of the M1 reference signals
  • the transmission power is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is The M1 multi-carrier symbols Before and after the M multicarrier symbols.
  • the first receiver module 1201 further receives second information; wherein the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and the K antenna port sets are Any of the antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; and the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the first receiver module 1201 further receives third information, where the third information is used to determine a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals and the M The transmission power of any of the reference signals is the same, and the reception of the third information precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
  • the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the target reference signal group Include one or more of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate air interface resources are used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, wherein any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, and the S is greater than 1 Integer.
  • the first receiver module 1201 further receives fourth information, where the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the first receiver module 1201 includes ⁇ receiver 456, receiving processor 452, controller/processor 490 ⁇ in Embodiment 4.
  • the first receiver module 1201 includes at least two of the ⁇ receiver 456, the receiving processor 452, the controller/processor 490 ⁇ in Embodiment 4.
  • the first transmitter module 1202 includes ⁇ transmitter 456, transmit processor 455, controller/processor 490 ⁇ in embodiment 4.
  • the first transmitter module 1202 includes at least the first two of ⁇ transmitter 456, transmit processor 455, controller/processor 490 ⁇ in embodiment 4.
  • Embodiment 17 exemplifies a structural block diagram of a processing device in a base station device, as shown in FIG.
  • the processing device 1300 in the base station device is mainly composed of a second transmitter module 1301 and a second receiver module 1302.
  • a second transmitter module 1301 transmitting first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
  • a second receiver module 1302 for the N multicarrier symbols on the first subband, M reference signals are respectively received in only the M multicarrier symbols therein.
  • the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, Said M reference signals are transmitted by U1 antenna port groups in said N1 antenna port groups, said M being a positive integer not greater than said N, said U1 being a positive integer not greater than said M, said N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
  • the second receiver module 1302 further receives M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband; wherein any one of the M1 reference signals
  • the transmission power is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is
  • the M1 multicarrier symbols are preceded by the M multicarrier symbols.
  • the second transmitter module 1301 further sends second information; wherein the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and the K antenna port sets are Any of the antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; and the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  • the second transmitter module 1301 further sends third information, where the third information is used to determine a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals and the M The transmission power of any of the reference signals is the same, and the reception of the third information precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
  • the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the target reference signal group Include one or more of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate air interface resources are used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, wherein any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, and the S is greater than 1 Integer.
  • the second transmitter module 1301 further sends fourth information, where the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  • the second transmitter module 1301 includes ⁇ transmitter 416, transmit processor 415, controller/processor 440 ⁇ in embodiment 4.
  • the second transmitter module 1301 includes at least the first two of ⁇ transmitter 416, transmit processor 415, controller/processor 440 ⁇ in embodiment 4.
  • the second receiver module 1302 includes ⁇ receiver 416, receiving processor 412, controller/processor 440 ⁇ in Embodiment 4.
  • the second receiver module 1302 includes at least the first two of the ⁇ receiver 416, the receiving processor 412, and the controller/processor 440 ⁇ in Embodiment 4.
  • the UE or the terminal in the present application includes but is not limited to a wireless communication device such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook, an internet card, a low power consumption device, an eMTC device, an NB-IoT device, and an in-vehicle communication device.
  • the base station or network side device in this application includes, but is not limited to, a macro communication base station, a micro cell base station, a home base station, a relay base station, an eNB, a gNB, a transmission receiving node TRP, and the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application discloses a method and a device used in user equipment and in a base station for wireless communication. The method comprises: user equipment receiving first information, the first information being used for determining N multi-carrier symbols on a first sub-band, N being a positive integer greater than 1; performing first access detection to determine M multi-carrier symbols among the N multi-carrier symbols; for the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, sending M reference signals merely in the M multi-carrier symbols, respectively, the M reference signals being used to determine the M multi-carrier symbols among the N multi-carrier symbols, M being a positive integer not greater than N. The method above solves the problem of transmission of a plurality of uplink wireless signals corresponding to beam-based unlicensed spectrum access detection.

Description

一种被用于无线通信的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置User equipment, method and device in base station used for wireless communication 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信系统中的无线信号的传输方法和装置,尤其是支持蜂窝网的无线通信系统中的无线信号的传输方法和装置。The present application relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting wireless signals in a wireless communication system, and more particularly to a method and apparatus for transmitting wireless signals in a wireless communication system supporting a cellular network.
背景技术Background technique
传统的3GPP(3rd Generation Partner Project,第三代合作伙伴项目)LTE(Long-term Evolution,长期演进)系统中,数据传输只能发生在授权频谱上,然而随着业务量的急剧增大,尤其在一些城市地区,授权频谱可能难以满足业务量的需求。Release 13及Release 14中非授权频谱上的通信被蜂窝系统引入,并用于下行和上行数据的传输。为保证和其它非授权频谱上的接入技术兼容,LBT(Listen Before Talk,会话前侦听)技术被LAA(Licensed Assisted Access,授权频谱辅助接入)采纳以避免因多个发射机同时占用相同的频率资源而带来的干扰。LTE系统的发射机采纳准全向天线来执行LBT。In the traditional 3GPP (3rd Generation Partner Project) LTE (Long-term Evolution) system, data transmission can only occur on the licensed spectrum, but with the sharp increase of traffic, especially In some urban areas, licensed spectrum may be difficult to meet the demand for traffic. The communication on the unlicensed spectrum in Release 13 and Release 14 is introduced by the cellular system and used for the transmission of downlink and uplink data. To ensure compatibility with access technologies on other unlicensed spectrums, LBT (Listen Before Talk) technology is adopted by LAA (Licensed Assisted Access) to avoid multiple transmitters occupying the same time. The interference caused by the frequency resources. The transmitter of the LTE system employs a quasi-omnidirectional antenna to perform LBT.
目前,5G NR(New Radio Access Technology,新无线接入技术)的技术讨论正在进行中,其中大规模(Massive)MIMO(Multi-Input Multi-Output)成为下一代移动通信的一个研究热点。大规模MIMO中,多个天线通过波束赋形(Beamforming),形成指向一个特定空间方向的波束来提高通信质量,当考虑到波束赋形带来的覆盖特性时,传统的LAA技术需要被重新考虑,比如LBT方案。At present, the technical discussion of 5G NR (New Radio Access Technology) is underway, among which Massive MIMO (Multi-Input Multi-Output) is a research hotspot of next-generation mobile communication. In massive MIMO, multiple antennas are beamforming to form a beam directed to a specific spatial direction to improve communication quality. When considering the coverage characteristics brought by beamforming, traditional LAA techniques need to be reconsidered. , such as the LBT program.
发明内容Summary of the invention
发明人通过研究发现,5G系统中,波束赋形将会被大规模使用,而基于波束赋形的LBT方案将对上行无线信号的传输产生影响。针对多个波束的上行无线信号的传输可能需要采用多个基于波束赋形的LBT的过程,而这多个LBT可能会产生多个波束中只有部分波束上的上行无线信号可以被发送,因此多个LBT下的多波束上行无线信号的传输方案是需要解决的一个关键问题。The inventors found through research that beamforming will be used on a large scale in 5G systems, and the LBT scheme based on beamforming will affect the transmission of uplink wireless signals. The transmission of uplink wireless signals for multiple beams may require multiple beamforming-based LBT processes, and the multiple LBTs may generate uplink wireless signals on only a portion of the multiple beams that can be transmitted, thus The transmission scheme of multi-beam uplink wireless signals under LBT is a key problem to be solved.
针对上述问题,本申请公开了一种解决方案。需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本申请的UE(User Equipment,用户设备)中的实施例和实施例中的特征可以应用到基站中,反之亦然。进一步的,在不冲突的情况下,本申请的实施例和实施例中的特征可以任意相互组合。In response to the above problems, the present application discloses a solution. It should be noted that, in the case of no conflict, the features in the embodiments and embodiments in the UE (User Equipment) of the present application can be applied to the base station, and vice versa. Further, the features of the embodiments and the embodiments of the present application may be combined with each other arbitrarily without conflict.
本申请公开了一种用于无线通信的用户设备中的方法,其特征在于,包括:The present application discloses a method in a user equipment for wireless communication, which includes:
接收第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;Receiving first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;Performing first access detection, determining M multi-carrier symbols in the N multi-carrier symbols;
对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号;For the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, only M reference signals are respectively sent in the M multi-carrier symbols;
其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
作为一个实施例,上述方法的实质在于,第一接入检测对应一个或多个基于波束赋形的LBT,不同的LBT可能采用不同的波束进行监听,这一个或多个LBT的波束与基站期望在N个多载波符号上发送的上行参考信号的多个波束分别对应;某个波束的LBT通过后用户设备才可以在该波束对应的多载波符号上发送上行参考信号;如果某个波束的 LBT不通过,那么用户设备不可以在该波束对应的多载波符号上发送上行参考信号。采用上述方法的好处在于,通过参考信号和LBT之间的对应关系,用户设备可以根据实际不同波束上的信道占用情况,在未被某波束占用的信道上发送参考信号,避免了因多个发射机同时占用相同的频率资源而带来的干扰。As an embodiment, the essence of the foregoing method is that the first access detection corresponds to one or more beamforming-based LBTs, and different LBTs may be monitored by using different beams, and the one or more LBT beams and base stations are expected. The plurality of beams of the uplink reference signal transmitted on the N multi-carrier symbols respectively correspond to each other; after the LBT of a certain beam passes, the user equipment can send the uplink reference signal on the multi-carrier symbol corresponding to the beam; if a certain beam If the LBT does not pass, the user equipment may not send the uplink reference signal on the multi-carrier symbol corresponding to the beam. The advantage of the above method is that, by the correspondence between the reference signal and the LBT, the user equipment can transmit the reference signal on the channel not occupied by a certain beam according to the channel occupancy condition on the actual different beams, thereby avoiding multiple transmissions. The interference caused by the same frequency resource occupied by the machine at the same time.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号;Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband;
其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。The transmission power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is present. The multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and after the M multi-carrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,上述方法的实质在于,M个参考信号和M1个参考信号的发送分别是两次不同波束上的LBT之后的传输;由于对应同一个LBT的上行参考信号的波束方向局限在对应LBT的波束之内,为了让基站获知在LBT的波束之外的波束方向上是否有更好的波束,需要对多个LBT波束对应的多个参考信号传输进行公平的比较,因此需要用户设备在发送这多个参考信号时采用相同的发送功率。采用上述方法的好处在于,对多个LBT波束对应的多个参考信号采用相同的发送功率,以进行公平的信道/波束质量的比较。As an embodiment, the essence of the foregoing method is that the transmission of the M reference signals and the M1 reference signals are respectively after the LBTs on the two different beams; the beam direction limitations corresponding to the uplink reference signals corresponding to the same LBT are corresponding. Within the LBT beam, in order for the base station to know whether there is a better beam in the beam direction outside the LBT beam, it is necessary to perform a fair comparison of multiple reference signal transmissions corresponding to multiple LBT beams, thus requiring the user equipment to The same transmit power is used when transmitting these multiple reference signals. The advantage of using the above method is that the same transmit power is used for multiple reference signals corresponding to multiple LBT beams for fair channel/beam quality comparison.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
接收第二信息;Receiving the second information;
其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。The second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
接收第三信息;Receiving third information;
其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。The third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized in that an air interface resource occupied by a target reference signal group is used by a receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarriers from the N multicarrier symbols a symbol, the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S preparations The selected air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, The S is a positive integer greater than one.
作为一个实施例,上述方法的实质在于,基站在N个多载波符号上检测信号,通过检测出目标参考信号组可以进一步检测出M个参考信号;在目标参考信号组的检测中,基站分别采用S个备选空口资源进行检测,检测结果最好的一个备选空口资源就是目标参考信号组的空口资源。采用上述方法的好处在于,通过盲检M个参考信号中的一个或多个参考信号可以进一步检测出M个参考信号中的其余参考信号,从而基站可以获知哪些参考信号的发送波束没有通过上行LBT。As an embodiment, the essence of the foregoing method is that the base station detects signals on N multi-carrier symbols, and further detects M reference signals by detecting the target reference signal group; in detecting the target reference signal group, the base station adopts The S candidate air interface resources are detected, and the best candidate air interface resource is the air interface resource of the target reference signal group. The advantage of using the above method is that the remaining reference signals of the M reference signals can be further detected by blindly detecting one or more reference signals of the M reference signals, so that the base station can know which reference signal transmission beams do not pass the uplink LBT. .
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
接收第四信息;Receiving fourth information;
其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。The fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
本申请公开了一种用于无线通信的基站设备中的方法,其特征在于,包括:The present invention discloses a method in a base station device for wireless communication, which includes:
发送第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N 是大于1的正整数;Transmitting first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on the first subband, the N Is a positive integer greater than one;
对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别接收M个参考信号;For the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, only M reference signals are respectively received in the M multi-carrier symbols;
其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别接收M1个参考信号;Receiving M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband;
其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。The transmission power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is present. The multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and after the M multi-carrier symbols.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
发送第二信息;Send the second message;
其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。The second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
发送第三信息;Send the third message;
其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。The third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized in that an air interface resource occupied by a target reference signal group is used by a receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarriers from the N multicarrier symbols a symbol, the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S preparations The selected air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, The S is a positive integer greater than one.
根据本申请的一个方面,上述方法的特征在于,包括:According to an aspect of the present application, the above method is characterized by comprising:
发送第四信息;Send the fourth message;
其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。The fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
本申请公开了一种用于无线通信的用户设备,其特征在于,包括:The present application discloses a user equipment for wireless communication, which includes:
第一接收机模块,接收第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;The first receiver module receives the first information, the first information is used to determine N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, the N is a positive integer greater than 1; performing the first access detection, determining M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols;
第一发射机模块,对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号;a first transmitter module, for each of the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, transmitting M reference signals respectively in the M multi-carrier symbols;
其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第一发射机模块还在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号;其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一 参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。As an embodiment, the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the first transmitter module further transmits M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band; wherein the M1 reference signals Any of The transmit power of the reference signal is the same as the transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment, the multi-carrier not occupied by the user equipment The symbol is preceded by the M1 multicarrier symbols and after the M multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第一接收机模块还接收第二信息;其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。In one embodiment, the user equipment is characterized in that the first receiver module further receives second information, wherein the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, Any of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; and the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第一接收机模块还接收第三信息;其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。In one embodiment, the user equipment is characterized in that the first receiver module further receives third information, wherein the third information is used to determine transmission of any one of the M1 reference signals. The power is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and the reception of the third information precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。As an embodiment, the user equipment is characterized in that the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is used by the receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multi-carrier symbols from the N multi-carrier symbols. The target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate The air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, S is a positive integer greater than one.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第一接收机模块还接收第四信息;其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。As an embodiment, the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the first receiver module further receives fourth information, where the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S Multi-carrier symbol group.
本申请公开了一种用于无线通信的基站设备,其特征在于,包括:The present application discloses a base station device for wireless communication, which includes:
第二发射机模块,发送第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;a second transmitter module, transmitting first information, where the first information is used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first subband, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
第二接收机模块,对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别接收M个参考信号;a second receiver module, for each of the M multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, receiving M reference signals respectively in the M multi-carrier symbols;
其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第二接收机模块还在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别接收M1个参考信号;其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。As an embodiment, the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second receiver module further receives M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band; wherein the M1 reference signals The transmission power of any one of the reference signals is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is present, and the user equipment is not The occupied multicarrier symbols are before the M1 multicarrier symbols and after the M multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第二发射机模块还发送第二信息;As an embodiment, the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second transmitter module further sends second information;
其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。The second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第二发射机模块还发送第三信息;As an embodiment, the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second transmitter module further sends third information;
其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。The third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确 定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。As an embodiment, the user equipment is characterized in that the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is used by the receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multi-carrier symbols from the N multi-carrier symbols. The target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate Air interface resources are used separately S multi-carrier symbol groups, any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups being composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, the S being greater than 1 A positive integer.
作为一个实施例,上述用户设备的特征在于,所述第二发射机模块还发送第四信息;As an embodiment, the foregoing user equipment is characterized in that the second transmitter module further sends fourth information;
其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。The fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
作为一个实施例,相比现有公开技术,本申请具有如下主要技术优势:As an embodiment, the present application has the following main technical advantages over the prior art:
-.一个或多个LBT的波束与基站期望的上行参考信号的多个波束分别对应;某个波束的LBT通过后用户设备才可以在该波束对应的多载波符号上发送上行参考信号;如果某个波束的LBT不通过,那么用户设备不可以在该波束对应的多载波符号上发送上行参考信号。通过参考信号和LBT之间的对应关系,用户设备可以根据实际不同波束上的信道占用情况,在未被某波束占用的信道上发送参考信号,避免了因多个发射机同时占用相同的频率资源而带来的干扰。- the one or more LBT beams respectively correspond to the plurality of beams of the uplink reference signal expected by the base station; after the LBT of a certain beam passes, the user equipment can send the uplink reference signal on the multicarrier symbol corresponding to the beam; The LBT of the beam does not pass, and the user equipment may not send the uplink reference signal on the multi-carrier symbol corresponding to the beam. Through the correspondence between the reference signal and the LBT, the user equipment can transmit the reference signal on the channel that is not occupied by a certain beam according to the channel occupancy condition on the actual different beams, thereby avoiding that multiple transmitters occupy the same frequency resource at the same time. And the interference.
-.对多个LBT波束对应的多个上行参考信号采用相同的发送功率,以进行公平的信道/波束质量的比较。- Use the same transmit power for multiple uplink reference signals corresponding to multiple LBT beams for fair channel/beam quality comparison.
-.通过盲检多个参考信号中的一个或多个参考信号可以进一步检测出其余参考信号,从而基站可以获知哪些参考信号的发送波束没有通过上行LBT。By blindly checking one or more of the plurality of reference signals, the remaining reference signals can be further detected, so that the base station can know which reference signal transmission beams have not passed the uplink LBT.
附图说明DRAWINGS
通过阅读参照以下附图中的对非限制性实施例所作的详细描述,本申请的其它特征、目的和优点将会变得更加明显:Other features, objects, and advantages of the present application will become more apparent from the detailed description of the accompanying drawings.
图1示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的第一信息、第一接入检测和M个参考信号的流程图;1 shows a flow chart of first information, first access detection, and M reference signals in accordance with one embodiment of the present application;
图2示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的网络架构的示意图;2 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture in accordance with one embodiment of the present application;
图3示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的用户平面和控制平面的无线协议架构的实施例的示意图;3 shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a radio protocol architecture of a user plane and a control plane in accordance with one embodiment of the present application;
图4示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的演进节点和UE的示意图;FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of an evolved node and a UE according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图5示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的无线传输的流程图;FIG. 5 shows a flow chart of wireless transmission in accordance with one embodiment of the present application;
图6示出了根据本申请的另一个实施例的无线传输的流程图;6 shows a flow chart of wireless transmission in accordance with another embodiment of the present application;
图7A-7E分别示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的N个多载波符号、N1个天线端口组和M个参考信号的关系的示意图;7A-7E are schematic diagrams showing the relationship of N multicarrier symbols, N1 antenna port groups, and M reference signals, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8A-8E分别示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的N3个多载波符号、Q个天线端口组和M1个参考信号的关系的示意图;8A-8E are schematic diagrams showing the relationship of N3 multicarrier symbols, Q antenna port groups, and M1 reference signals, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的M1个参考信号和M个参考信号的关系的示意图;9 is a diagram showing the relationship of M1 reference signals and M reference signals according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的M个参考信号被用于从N个多载波符号中确定M个多载波符号的示意图;10 shows a schematic diagram of M reference signals used to determine M multi-carrier symbols from N multi-carrier symbols, in accordance with an embodiment of the present application;
图11A-11B分别示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的第一接入检测和N1个天线端口组的关系的示意图;11A-11B are schematic diagrams showing a relationship between a first access detection and an N1 antenna port group, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12A-12B分别示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的给定接入检测和给定无线信号的空间关系的示意图;12A-12B respectively show schematic diagrams of spatial relationships for a given access detection and a given wireless signal, in accordance with one embodiment of the present application;
图13示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的天线端口和天线端口组的示意图;Figure 13 shows a schematic diagram of an antenna port and an antenna port group in accordance with one embodiment of the present application;
图14A-14B分别示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的第二接入检测和Q个天线端口组的关系的示意图;14A-14B are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between a second access detection and a Q antenna port group, respectively, according to an embodiment of the present application;
图15A-15C分别示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的一次接入检测的示意图;15A-15C respectively show schematic diagrams of one access detection according to an embodiment of the present application;
图16示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的用于用户设备中的处理装置的结构框图; FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the structure of a processing device for use in a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present application;
图17示出了根据本申请的一个实施例的用于基站设备中的处理装置的结构框图;FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the structure of a processing apparatus used in a base station apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application;
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下文将结合附图对本申请的技术方案作进一步详细说明,需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本申请的实施例和实施例中的特征可以任意相互组合。The technical solutions of the present application are further described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be noted that the features in the embodiments and the embodiments of the present application may be combined with each other without conflict.
实施例1Example 1
实施例1示例了第一信息、第一接入检测和M个参考信号的流程图,如附图1所示。 Embodiment 1 illustrates a flow chart of the first information, the first access detection, and the M reference signals, as shown in FIG.
在实施例1中,本申请中的所述用户设备接收第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号;其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。In Embodiment 1, the user equipment in the present application receives first information, where the first information is used to determine N multi-carrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one; Performing a first access detection, determining M multi-carrier symbols in the N multi-carrier symbols; and for the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, only the M multi-carriers therein Transmitting M reference signals respectively; wherein the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols being allocated to N1 The antenna port group, the M reference signals are sent by the U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, and the U1 is not greater than the M A positive integer, the N1 being a positive integer not greater than the N.
作为一个实施例,所述M个参考信号包括{SRS(Sounding Reference Signal,探测参考信号),上行PTRS(Phase-Tracking Reference Signal,相位跟踪参考信号)}中的一种或多种。As an embodiment, the M reference signals include one or more of a {SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) and an Upstream PTRS (Phase-Tracking Reference Signal).
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息是半静态配置的。As an embodiment, the first information is semi-statically configured.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由更高层信令承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by higher layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由RRC(Radio Resource Control,无线电资源控制)信令承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息是一个RRC信令中的一个IE(Information Element,信息单元)的全部或一部分。As an embodiment, the first information is all or a part of an IE (Information Element) in one RRC signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由MAC(Medium Access Control,媒体接入控制)CE(Control Element,控制单元)信令承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by a MAC (Medium Access Control) CE (Control Element) signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息在SIB(System Information Block,系统信息块)中传输。As an embodiment, the first information is transmitted in an SIB (System Information Block).
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息是动态配置的。As an embodiment, the first information is dynamically configured.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由物理层信令承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by physical layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息属于DCI(下行控制信息,Downlink Control Information)。As an embodiment, the first information belongs to DCI (Downlink Control Information).
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息是一个DCI中的一个域(Field),所述域包括正整数个比特。As an embodiment, the first information is a field in a DCI, and the field includes a positive integer number of bits.
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由下行物理层控制信道(即仅能用于承载物理层信令的下行信道)承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by a downlink physical layer control channel (ie, a downlink channel that can only be used to carry physical layer signaling).
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel,物理下行控制信道)承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by a PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel).
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由sPDCCH(short PDCCH,短PDCCH)承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by an sPDCCH (short PDCCH).
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由NR-PDCCH(New Radio PDCCH,新无线PDCCH)承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by an NR-PDCCH (New Radio PDCCH).
作为一个实施例,所述第一信息由NB-PDCCH(Narrow Band PDCCH,窄带PDCCH)承载。As an embodiment, the first information is carried by a NB-PDCCH (Narrow Band PDCCH).
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带包括正整数个PRB(Physical Resource Block,物理资源块)。As an embodiment, the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of PRBs (Physical Resource Blocks).
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带包括正整数个连续的PRB。As an embodiment, the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of consecutive PRBs.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带包括正整数个RB(Resource Block,资源块)。 As an embodiment, the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of RBs (Resource Blocks).
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带包括正整数个连续的RB。As an embodiment, the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of consecutive RBs.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带包括正整数个连续的子载波。As an embodiment, the first sub-band includes a positive integer number of consecutive sub-carriers.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带包括的连续子载波数目等于12的正整数倍。As an embodiment, the first sub-band includes a number of consecutive sub-carriers equal to a positive integer multiple of 12.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带部署于非授权频谱。As an embodiment, the first sub-band is deployed in an unlicensed spectrum.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带属于一个载波(Carrier)。As an embodiment, the first sub-band belongs to one carrier.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带属于一个BWP(Bandwidth Part,带宽分量)。As an embodiment, the first sub-band belongs to a BWP (Bandwidth Part).
作为一个实施例,所述多载波符号是OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing,正交频分复用)符号。As an embodiment, the multi-carrier symbol is an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) symbol.
作为一个实施例,所述多载波符号是SC-FDMA(Single-Carrier Frequency-Division Multiple Access,单载波频分多址)符号。As an embodiment, the multi-carrier symbol is a SC-FDMA (Single-Carrier Frequency-Division Multiple Access) symbol.
作为一个实施例,所述多载波符号是FBMC(Filter Bank Multi Carrier,滤波组多载波)符号。As an embodiment, the multi-carrier symbol is a FBMC (Filter Bank Multi Carrier) symbol.
作为一个实施例,所述多载波符号包括CP(Cyclic Prefix,循环前缀)。As an embodiment, the multi-carrier symbol includes a CP (Cyclic Prefix).
作为一个实施例,所述M个参考信号被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数。In one embodiment, the M reference signals are used by a receiver of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, where M is not greater than the N Positive integer.
实施例2Example 2
实施例2示例了网络架构的示意图,如附图2所示。 Embodiment 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of a network architecture, as shown in FIG.
实施例2示例了根据本申请的一个网络架构的示意图,如附图2所示。图2是说明了NR 5G,LTE(Long-Term Evolution,长期演进)及LTE-A(Long-Term Evolution Advanced,增强长期演进)系统网络架构200的图。NR 5G或LTE网络架构200可称为EPS(Evolved Packet System,演进分组系统)200某种其它合适术语。EPS 200可包括一个或一个以上UE(User Equipment,用户设备)201,NG-RAN(下一代无线接入网络)202,EPC(Evolved Packet Core,演进分组核心)/5G-CN(5G-Core Network,5G核心网)210,HSS(Home Subscriber Server,归属签约用户服务器)220和因特网服务230。EPS可与其它接入网络互连,但为了简单未展示这些实体/接口。如图所示,EPS提供包交换服务,然而所属领域的技术人员将容易了解,贯穿本申请呈现的各种概念可扩展到提供电路交换服务的网络或其它蜂窝网络。NG-RAN包括NR节点B(gNB)203和其它gNB204。gNB203提供面向UE201的用户和控制平面协议终止。gNB203可经由Xn接口(例如,回程)连接到其它gNB204。gNB203也可称为基站、基站收发台、无线电基站、无线电收发器、收发器功能、基本服务集合(BSS)、扩展服务集合(ESS)、TRP(发送接收点)或某种其它合适术语。gNB203为UE201提供对EPC/5G-CN210的接入点。UE201的实例包括蜂窝式电话、智能电话、会话起始协议(SIP)电话、膝上型计算机、个人数字助理(PDA)、卫星无线电、非地面基站通信、卫星移动通信、全球定位系统、多媒体装置、视频装置、数字音频播放器(例如,MP3播放器)、相机、游戏控制台、无人机、飞行器、窄带物理网设备、机器类型通信设备、陆地交通工具、汽车、可穿戴设备,或任何其它类似功能装置。所属领域的技术人员也可将UE201称为移动台、订户台、移动单元、订户单元、无线单元、远程单元、移动装置、无线装置、无线通信装置、远程装置、移动订户台、接入终端、移动终端、无线终端、远程终端、手持机、用户代理、移动客户端、客户端或某个其它合适术语。gNB203通过S1/NG接口连接到EPC/5G-CN210。EPC/5G-CN210包括MME/AMF/UPF 211、其它MME(Mobility Management Entity,移动性管理实体)/AMF(Authentication Management Field,鉴权管理域)/UPF(User Plane Function,用户平面功能)214、S-GW(Service Gateway,服务网关)212以及P-GW(Packet Date Network Gateway,分组数据网络网关)213。MME/AMF/UPF211是处理UE201与EPC/5G-CN210之间的信令的控制节点。大体上,MME/AMF/UPF211提供承载和连接管理。所有用户IP(Internet Protocal,因特网协议)包是通过S-GW212传送,S-GW212自身连接到P-GW213。P-GW213提供UE IP 地址分配以及其它功能。P-GW213连接到因特网服务230。因特网服务230包括运营商对应因特网协议服务,具体可包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem,IP多媒体子系统)和PS串流服务(PSS)。 Embodiment 2 illustrates a schematic diagram of a network architecture in accordance with the present application, as shown in FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an NR 5G, LTE (Long-Term Evolution, Long Term Evolution) and LTE-A (Long-Term Evolution Advanced) system network architecture 200. The NR 5G or LTE network architecture 200 may be referred to as an EPS (Evolved Packet System) 200 in some other suitable terminology. The EPS 200 may include one or more UEs (User Equipment) 201, NG-RAN (Next Generation Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core)/5G-CN (5G-Core Network) , 5G core network) 210, HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 220 and Internet service 230. EPS can be interconnected with other access networks, but these entities/interfaces are not shown for simplicity. As shown, the EPS provides packet switching services, although those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that the various concepts presented throughout this application can be extended to networks or other cellular networks that provide circuit switched services. The NG-RAN includes an NR Node B (gNB) 203 and other gNBs 204. The gNB 203 provides user and control plane protocol termination for the UE 201. The gNB 203 can be connected to other gNBs 204 via an Xn interface (eg, a backhaul). The gNB 203 may also be referred to as a base station, base transceiver station, radio base station, radio transceiver, transceiver function, basic service set (BSS), extended service set (ESS), TRP (transmission and reception point), or some other suitable terminology. The gNB 203 provides the UE 201 with an access point to the EPC/5G-CN 210. Examples of UEs 201 include cellular telephones, smart phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, laptop computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), satellite radios, non-terrestrial base station communications, satellite mobile communications, global positioning systems, multimedia devices , video device, digital audio player (eg, MP3 player), camera, game console, drone, aircraft, narrowband physical network device, machine type communication device, land vehicle, car, wearable device, or any Other similar functional devices. A person skilled in the art may also refer to UE 201 as a mobile station, a subscriber station, a mobile unit, a subscriber unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a mobile device, a wireless device, a wireless communication device, a remote device, a mobile subscriber station, an access terminal, Mobile terminal, wireless terminal, remote terminal, handset, user agent, mobile client, client or some other suitable term. The gNB203 is connected to the EPC/5G-CN210 through the S1/NG interface. EPC/5G-CN210 includes MME/AMF/UPF 211, other MME (Mobility Management Entity)/AMF (Authentication Management Field)/UPF (User Plane Function) 214, S-GW (Service Gateway) 212 and P-GW (Packet Date Network Gateway) 213. The MME/AMF/UPF 211 is a control node that handles signaling between the UE 201 and the EPC/5G-CN 210. In general, MME/AMF/UPF 211 provides bearer and connection management. All User IP (Internet Protocol) packets are transmitted through the S-GW 212, and the S-GW 212 itself is connected to the P-GW 213. P-GW213 provides UE IP Address assignment and other features. The P-GW 213 is connected to the Internet service 230. The Internet service 230 includes an operator-compatible Internet Protocol service, and may specifically include the Internet, an intranet, an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem), and a PS Streaming Service (PSS).
作为一个实施例,所述UE201对应本申请中的所述用户设备。As an embodiment, the UE 201 corresponds to the user equipment in this application.
作为一个实施例,所述gNB203对应本申请中的所述基站。As an embodiment, the gNB 203 corresponds to the base station in the present application.
作为一个实施例,所述UE201支持在非授权频谱上进行数据传输的无线通信。As an embodiment, the UE 201 supports wireless communication for data transmission over an unlicensed spectrum.
作为一个实施例,所述gNB203支持在非授权频谱上进行数据传输的无线通信。As an embodiment, the gNB 203 supports wireless communication for data transmission over an unlicensed spectrum.
作为一个实施例,所述UE201支持大规模MIMO的无线通信。As an embodiment, the UE 201 supports wireless communication of massive MIMO.
作为一个实施例,所述gNB203支持大规模MIMO的无线通信。As an embodiment, the gNB 203 supports wireless communication for massive MIMO.
实施例3Example 3
实施例3示出了根据本申请的一个用户平面和控制平面的无线协议架构的实施例的示意图,如附图3所示。Embodiment 3 shows a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a radio protocol architecture of a user plane and a control plane in accordance with the present application, as shown in FIG.
附图3是说明用于用户平面和控制平面的无线电协议架构的实施例的示意图,图3用三个层展示用于用户设备(UE)和基站设备(gNB或eNB)的无线电协议架构:层1、层2和层3。层1(L1层)是最低层且实施各种PHY(物理层)信号处理功能。L1层在本文将称为PHY301。层2(L2层)305在PHY301之上,且负责通过PHY301在UE与gNB之间的链路。在用户平面中,L2层305包括MAC(Medium Access Control,媒体接入控制)子层302、RLC(Radio Link Control,无线链路层控制协议)子层303和PDCP(Packet Data Convergence Protocol,分组数据汇聚协议)子层304,这些子层终止于网络侧上的gNB处。虽然未图示,但UE可具有在L2层305之上的若干上部层,包括终止于网络侧上的P-GW处的网络层(例如,IP层)和终止于连接的另一端(例如,远端UE、服务器等等)处的应用层。PDCP子层304提供不同无线电承载与逻辑信道之间的多路复用。PDCP子层304还提供用于上部层数据包的标头压缩以减少无线电发射开销,通过加密数据包而提供安全性,以及提供gNB之间的对UE的越区移交支持。RLC子层303提供上部层数据包的分段和重组装,丢失数据包的重新发射以及数据包的重排序以补偿由于HARQ造成的无序接收。MAC子层302提供逻辑与输送信道之间的多路复用。MAC子层302还负责在UE之间分配一个小区中的各种无线电资源(例如,资源块)。MAC子层302还负责HARQ操作。在控制平面中,用于UE和gNB的无线电协议架构对于物理层301和L2层305来说大体上相同,但没有用于控制平面的标头压缩功能。控制平面还包括层3(L3层)中的RRC(Radio Resource Control,无线电资源控制)子层306。RRC子层306负责获得无线电资源(即,无线电承载)且使用gNB与UE之间的RRC信令来配置下部层。3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an embodiment of a radio protocol architecture for a user plane and a control plane, and FIG. 3 shows a radio protocol architecture for user equipment (UE) and base station equipment (gNB or eNB) in three layers: layer 1, layer 2 and layer 3. Layer 1 (L1 layer) is the lowest layer and implements various PHY (physical layer) signal processing functions. The L1 layer will be referred to herein as PHY 301. Layer 2 (L2 layer) 305 is above PHY 301 and is responsible for the link between the UE and the gNB through PHY 301. In the user plane, the L2 layer 305 includes a MAC (Medium Access Control) sublayer 302, an RLC (Radio Link Control) sublayer 303, and a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol). Convergence Protocol) Sublayer 304, which terminates at the gNB on the network side. Although not illustrated, the UE may have several upper layers above the L2 layer 305, including a network layer (eg, an IP layer) terminated at the P-GW on the network side and terminated at the other end of the connection (eg, Application layer at the remote UE, server, etc.). The PDCP sublayer 304 provides multiplexing between different radio bearers and logical channels. The PDCP sublayer 304 also provides header compression for upper layer data packets to reduce radio transmission overhead, provides security by encrypting data packets, and provides handoff support for UEs between gNBs. The RLC sublayer 303 provides segmentation and reassembly of upper layer data packets, retransmission of lost data packets, and reordering of data packets to compensate for out-of-order reception due to HARQ. The MAC sublayer 302 provides multiplexing between the logical and transport channels. The MAC sublayer 302 is also responsible for allocating various radio resources (e.g., resource blocks) in one cell between UEs. The MAC sublayer 302 is also responsible for HARQ operations. In the control plane, the radio protocol architecture for the UE and gNB is substantially the same for the physical layer 301 and the L2 layer 305, but there is no header compression function for the control plane. The control plane also includes an RRC (Radio Resource Control) sublayer 306 in Layer 3 (L3 layer). The RRC sublayer 306 is responsible for obtaining radio resources (ie, radio bearers) and configuring the lower layer using RRC signaling between the gNB and the UE.
作为一个实施例,附图3中的无线协议架构适用于本申请中的所述用户设备。As an embodiment, the wireless protocol architecture of Figure 3 is applicable to the user equipment in this application.
作为一个实施例,附图3中的无线协议架构适用于本申请中的所述基站。As an embodiment, the radio protocol architecture of Figure 3 is applicable to the base station in this application.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第一信息生成于所述RRC子层306。As an embodiment, the first information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第一信息生成于所述MAC子层302。As an embodiment, the first information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第一信息生成于所述PHY301。As an embodiment, the first information in the present application is generated by the PHY 301.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第一接入检测生成于所述PHY301。As an embodiment, the first access detection in the present application is generated by the PHY 301.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述M个参考信号生成于所述PHY301。As an embodiment, the M reference signals in the present application are generated by the PHY 301.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述M1个参考信号生成于所述PHY301。As an embodiment, the M1 reference signals in the present application are generated by the PHY 301.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第二信息生成于所述RRC子层306。As an embodiment, the second information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第二信息生成于所述MAC子层302。As an embodiment, the second information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第三信息生成于所述RRC子层306。As an embodiment, the third information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第三信息生成于所述MAC子层302。As an embodiment, the third information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第三信息生成于所述PHY301。As an embodiment, the third information in the present application is generated by the PHY 301.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第四信息生成于所述RRC子层306。 As an embodiment, the fourth information in this application is generated in the RRC sublayer 306.
作为一个实施例,本申请中的所述第四信息生成于所述MAC子层302。As an embodiment, the fourth information in the present application is generated in the MAC sublayer 302.
实施例4Example 4
实施例4示出了根据本申请的一个基站设备和用户设备的示意图,如附图4所示。图4是在接入网络中与UE450通信的gNB410的框图。Embodiment 4 shows a schematic diagram of a base station device and a user equipment according to the present application, as shown in FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a gNB 410 in communication with a UE 450 in an access network.
基站设备(410)包括控制器/处理器440,存储器430,接收处理器412,发射处理器415,发射器/接收器416和天线420。The base station device (410) includes a controller/processor 440, a memory 430, a receive processor 412, a transmit processor 415, a transmitter/receiver 416, and an antenna 420.
用户设备(450)包括控制器/处理器490,存储器480,数据源467,发射处理器455,接收处理器452,发射器/接收器456和天线460。The user equipment (450) includes a controller/processor 490, a memory 480, a data source 467, a transmit processor 455, a receive processor 452, a transmitter/receiver 456, and an antenna 460.
在下行传输中,与基站设备(410)有关的处理包括:In the downlink transmission, the processing related to the base station device (410) includes:
-控制器/处理器440,上层包到达,控制器/处理器440提供包头压缩、加密、包分段连接和重排序以及逻辑与传输信道之间的多路复用解复用,来实施用于用户平面和控制平面的L2层协议;上层包中可以包括数据或者控制信息,例如DL-SCH(Downlink Shared Channel,下行共享信道);a controller/processor 440, the upper layer packet arrives, the controller/processor 440 provides header compression, encryption, packet segmentation and reordering, and multiplexing and demultiplexing between the logical and transport channels for implementation The L2 layer protocol of the user plane and the control plane; the upper layer packet may include data or control information, such as a DL-SCH (Downlink Shared Channel);
控制器/处理器440,与存储程序代码和数据的存储器430相关联,存储器430可以为计算机可读媒体;a controller/processor 440 associated with a memory 430 storing program code and data, which may be a computer readable medium;
控制器/处理器440,包括调度单元以传输需求,调度单元用于调度与传输需求对应的空口资源;a controller/processor 440, including a scheduling unit to transmit a demand, and a scheduling unit, configured to schedule an air interface resource corresponding to the transmission requirement;
控制器/处理器440,确定第一信息;a controller/processor 440, determining first information;
发射处理器415,接收控制器/处理器440的输出比特流,实施用于L1层(即物理层)的各种信号发射处理功能包括编码、交织、加扰、调制、功率控制/分配和物理层控制信令(包括PBCH,PDCCH,PHICH,PCFICH,参考信号)生成等;The transmit processor 415 receives the output bit stream of the controller/processor 440 and implements various signal transmission processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including encoding, interleaving, scrambling, modulation, power control/allocation, and physics. Layer control signaling (including PBCH, PDCCH, PHICH, PCFICH, reference signal) generation, etc.;
发射器416,用于将发射处理器415提供的基带信号转换成射频信号并经由天线420发射出去;每个发射器416对各自的输入符号流进行采样处理得到各自的采样信号流。每个发射器416对各自的采样流进行进一步处理(比如数模转换,放大,过滤,上变频等)得到下行信号。A transmitter 416 is configured to convert the baseband signals provided by the transmit processor 415 into radio frequency signals and transmit them via the antenna 420; each of the transmitters 416 samples the respective input symbol streams to obtain respective sampled signal streams. Each transmitter 416 performs further processing (eg, digital to analog conversion, amplification, filtering, upconversion, etc.) on the respective sample streams to obtain a downlink signal.
在下行传输中,与用户设备(450)有关的处理可以包括:In the downlink transmission, the processing related to the user equipment (450) may include:
接收器456,用于将通过天线460接收的射频信号转换成基带信号提供给接收处理器452; Receiver 456, for converting the radio frequency signal received through the antenna 460 into a baseband signal is provided to the receiving processor 452;
接收处理器452,实施用于L1层(即,物理层)的各种信号接收处理功能包括解码、解交织、解扰、解调和物理层控制信令提取等;The receiving processor 452 implements various signal receiving processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including decoding, deinterleaving, descrambling, demodulation, and physical layer control signaling extraction, and the like;
控制器/处理器490,确定第一信息;a controller/processor 490, determining first information;
控制器/处理器490,接收接收处理器452输出的比特流,提供包头解压缩、解密、包分段连接和重排序以及逻辑与传输信道之间的多路复用解复用,来实施用于用户平面和控制平面的L2层协议;The controller/processor 490 receives the bit stream output by the receiving processor 452, provides header decompression, decryption, packet segmentation and reordering, and multiplexing and demultiplexing between the logical and transport channels for implementation. L2 layer protocol for user plane and control plane;
控制器/处理器490与存储程序代码和数据的存储器480相关联。存储器480可以为计算机可读媒体。Controller/processor 490 is associated with memory 480 that stores program codes and data. Memory 480 can be a computer readable medium.
在UL(Uplink,上行)中,与基站设备(410)有关的处理包括:In UL (Uplink), the processing related to the base station device (410) includes:
接收器416,通过其相应天线420接收射频信号,把接收到的射频信号转化成基带信号,并把基带信号提供到接收处理器412;The receiver 416 receives the radio frequency signal through its corresponding antenna 420, converts the received radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and supplies the baseband signal to the receiving processor 412;
接收处理器412,实施用于L1层(即,物理层)的各种信号接收处理功能包括解码、解交织、解扰、解调和物理层控制信令提取等;The receiving processor 412 implements various signal receiving processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including decoding, deinterleaving, descrambling, demodulation, and physical layer control signaling extraction, and the like;
控制器/处理器440,实施L2层功能,以及与存储程序代码和数据的存储器430相关联;Controller/processor 440, implementing L2 layer functions, and associated with memory 430 storing program code and data;
控制器/处理器440提供输送与逻辑信道之间的多路分用、包重组装、解密、标头解压缩、控制信号处理以恢复来自UE450的上层数据包;来自控制器/处理器440的上 层数据包可提供到核心网络;Controller/processor 440 provides demultiplexing, packet reassembly, decryption, header decompression, control signal processing between the transport and logical channels to recover upper layer data packets from UE 450; from controller/processor 440 On Layer packets can be provided to the core network;
控制器/处理器440,确定M个参考信号;a controller/processor 440, determining M reference signals;
在UL(Uplink,上行)中,与用户设备(450)有关的处理包括:In UL (Uplink), the processing related to the user equipment (450) includes:
数据源467,将上层数据包提供到控制器/处理器490。数据源467表示L2层之上的所有协议层; Data source 467 provides the upper layer data packet to controller/processor 490. Data source 467 represents all protocol layers above the L2 layer;
发射器456,通过其相应天线460发射射频信号,把基带信号转化成射频信号,并把射频信号提供到相应天线460;The transmitter 456, transmits a radio frequency signal through its corresponding antenna 460, converts the baseband signal into a radio frequency signal, and provides the radio frequency signal to the corresponding antenna 460;
发射处理器455,实施用于L1层(即,物理层)的各种信号接收处理功能包括解码、解交织、解扰、解调和物理层控制信令提取等;The transmitter processor 455 implements various signal receiving processing functions for the L1 layer (ie, the physical layer) including decoding, deinterleaving, descrambling, demodulation, and physical layer control signaling extraction, and the like;
控制器/处理器490基于gNB410的无线资源分配来实施标头压缩、加密、包分段和重排序以及逻辑与输送信道之间的多路复用,实施用于用户平面和控制平面的L2层功能;The controller/processor 490 implements header compression, encryption, packet segmentation and reordering, and multiplexing between logical and transport channels based on the radio resource allocation of the gNB 410, implementing the L2 layer for the user plane and the control plane Features;
控制器/处理器490还负责HARQ操作、丢失包的重新发射,和到gNB410的信令;The controller/processor 490 is also responsible for HARQ operations, retransmission of lost packets, and signaling to the gNB 410;
控制器/处理器490,确定M个参考信号;a controller/processor 490, determining M reference signals;
作为一个子实施例,所述UE450装置包括:至少一个处理器以及至少一个存储器,所述至少一个存储器包括计算机程序代码;所述至少一个存储器和所述计算机程序代码被配置成与所述至少一个处理器一起使用,所述UE450装置至少:。As a sub-embodiment, the UE 450 apparatus includes: at least one processor and at least one memory, the at least one memory including computer program code; the at least one memory and the computer program code are configured to be The processor is used together, and the UE 450 device is at least:
作为一个子实施例,所述UE450包括:一种存储计算机可读指令程序的存储器,所述计算机可读指令程序在由至少一个处理器执行时产生动作,所述动作包括:。As a sub-embodiment, the UE 450 includes a memory storing a computer readable instruction program that, when executed by at least one processor, generates an action, the action comprising:
作为一个子实施例,所述gNB410装置包括:至少一个处理器以及至少一个存储器,所述至少一个存储器包括计算机程序代码;所述至少一个存储器和所述计算机程序代码被配置成与所述至少一个处理器一起使用。所述gNB410装置至少:。As a sub-embodiment, the gNB 410 apparatus includes: at least one processor and at least one memory, the at least one memory including computer program code; the at least one memory and the computer program code are configured to be The processor is used together. The gNB410 device is at least:
作为一个子实施例,所述gNB410包括:一种存储计算机可读指令程序的存储器,所述计算机可读指令程序在由至少一个处理器执行时产生动作,所述动作包括:。As a sub-embodiment, the gNB 410 includes a memory storing a computer readable instruction program that, when executed by at least one processor, generates an action, the action comprising:
作为一个子实施例,UE450对应本申请中的用户设备。As a sub-embodiment, the UE 450 corresponds to the user equipment in this application.
作为一个子实施例,gNB410对应本申请中的基站。As a sub-embodiment, gNB 410 corresponds to the base station in this application.
作为一个子实施例,接收器456、接收处理器452和控制器/处理器490中的至少前两者被用于接收本申请中的所述第一信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the first information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,发射器416、发射处理器415和控制器/处理器440中的至少前两者被用于发送本申请中的所述第一信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the first information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,接收器456、接收处理器452和控制器/处理器490中的至少前两者被用于接收本申请中的所述第二信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the second information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,发射器416、发射处理器415和控制器/处理器440中的至少前两者被用于发送本申请中的所述第二信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the second information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,接收器456、接收处理器452和控制器/处理器490中的至少前两者被用于接收本申请中的所述第三信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the third information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,发射器416、发射处理器415和控制器/处理器440中的至少前两者被用于发送本申请中的所述第三信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the third information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,接收器456、接收处理器452和控制器/处理器490中的至少前两者被用于接收本申请中的所述第四信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to receive the fourth information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,发射器416、发射处理器415和控制器/处理器440中的至少前两者被用于发送本申请中的所述第四信息。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the transmitter 416, the transmit processor 415, and the controller/processor 440 are used to transmit the fourth information in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,接收器456、接收处理器452和控制器/处理器490中的至少前两者被用于执行本申请中的所述第一接入检测。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the receiver 456, the receive processor 452, and the controller/processor 490 are used to perform the first access detection in this application.
作为一个子实施例,发射器456、发射处理器455和控制器/处理器490中的至少前两者被用于发送本申请中的所述M个参考信号。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the transmitter 456, the transmit processor 455, and the controller/processor 490 are used to transmit the M reference signals in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,接收器416、接收处理器412和控制器/处理器440中的至少 前两者被用于接收本申请中的所述M个参考信号。As a sub-embodiment, at least one of the receiver 416, the receive processor 412, and the controller/processor 440 The first two are used to receive the M reference signals in this application.
作为一个子实施例,发射器456、发射处理器455和控制器/处理器490中的至少前两者被用于发送本申请中的所述M1个参考信号。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the transmitter 456, the transmit processor 455, and the controller/processor 490 are used to transmit the M1 reference signals in the present application.
作为一个子实施例,接收器416、接收处理器412和控制器/处理器440中的至少前两者被用于接收本申请中的所述M1个参考信号。As a sub-embodiment, at least two of the receiver 416, the receive processor 412, and the controller/processor 440 are used to receive the M1 reference signals in the present application.
实施例5Example 5
实施例5示例了一个无线传输的流程图,如附图5所示。在附图5中,基站N01是用户设备U02的服务小区维持基站。附图5中,方框F1、F2和F3是可选的。 Embodiment 5 illustrates a flow chart of a wireless transmission, as shown in FIG. In FIG. 5, base station N01 is a serving cell maintenance base station of user equipment U02. In Figure 5, blocks F1, F2 and F3 are optional.
对于N01,在步骤S10中发送第二信息;在步骤S11中发送第一信息;在步骤S12中发送第四信息;在步骤S13中接收M个参考信号;在步骤S14中发送第三信息;在步骤S15中接收M1个参考信号。For N01, transmitting the second information in step S10; transmitting the first information in step S11; transmitting the fourth information in step S12; receiving M reference signals in step S13; transmitting the third information in step S14; M1 reference signals are received in step S15.
对于U02,在步骤S20中接收第二信息;在步骤S21中接收第一信息;在步骤S22中接收第四信息;在步骤S23中执行第一接入检测;在步骤S24中发送M个参考信号;在步骤S25中接收第三信息;在步骤S26中发送M1个参考信号。For U02, the second information is received in step S20; the first information is received in step S21; the fourth information is received in step S22; the first access detection is performed in step S23; and M reference signals are transmitted in step S24. Receiving the third information in step S25; transmitting M1 reference signals in step S26.
在实施例5中,所述第一信息被所述U02用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;所述U02执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号;所述M个参考信号被所述N01用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被所述N01分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。所述第二信息被所述U02用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。所述第三信息被所述U02用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。所述第四信息被所述U02用于确定本申请中的所述S个备选空口资源分别对应本申请中的所述S个多载波符号组。In Embodiment 5, the first information is used by the U02 to determine N multi-carrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N is a positive integer greater than 1; the U02 performs a first access detection, Determining M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols; for the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, transmitting M references respectively in only the M multi-carrier symbols The M reference signals are used by the N01 to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated by the N01 to the N1 antenna port groups. The M reference signals are sent by the U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups, where M is a positive integer not greater than the N, and the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M. The N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N. Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in the M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, and transmitting power of any one of the M1 reference signals and any one of the M reference signals The transmission power is the same, at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols after that. The second information is used by the U02 to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group A positive integer number of antenna ports is included; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets. The third information is used by the U02 to determine that the transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, the third information The reception is prior to the transmission of the M1 reference signals. The fourth information is used by the U02 to determine that the S candidate air interface resources in the present application respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups in the application.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号包括{SRS,上行PTRS}中的一种或多种。As an embodiment, the M1 reference signals include one or more of {SRS, uplink PTRS}.
作为一个实施例,所述M小于所述N。As an embodiment, the M is smaller than the N.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个多载波符号被关联到所述M个多载波符号。As an embodiment, the M1 multicarrier symbols are associated to the M multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个多载波符号被关联到所述M个多载波符号是指:所述M1个多载波符号与所述M个多载波符号在时域上都属于第一时间窗。As an embodiment, the M1 multi-carrier symbols are associated with the M multi-carrier symbols, where the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols belong to a first time window in a time domain. .
作为一个实施例,所述M1个多载波符号被关联到所述M个多载波符号是指:所述M1个多载波符号与所述M个多载波符号都被用于同一个测量过程As an embodiment, the M1 multi-carrier symbols are associated with the M multi-carrier symbols, wherein the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols are used in the same measurement process.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述同一个测量过程是波束管理(Beam Management)和/或信道估计。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the same measurement process is Beam Management and/or channel estimation.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个多载波符号和所述M个多载波符号分别属于两个上行突发。As an embodiment, the M1 multicarrier symbols and the M multicarrier symbols belong to two uplink bursts, respectively.
作为一个实施例,给定多载波符号被占用是指:所述给定多载波符号被用于发送无线信号。As an embodiment, given that a multi-carrier symbol is occupied means that the given multi-carrier symbol is used to transmit a wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,给定多载波符号未被占用是指:所述给定多载波符号未被用于发送无线信号。 As an embodiment, given that a multi-carrier symbol is unoccupied means that the given multi-carrier symbol is not used to transmit a wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,给定多载波符号被用户设备占用是指:所述给定多载波符号被所述用户设备用于发送无线信号。As an embodiment, given that a multi-carrier symbol is occupied by a user equipment means that the given multi-carrier symbol is used by the user equipment to transmit a wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,给定多载波符号未被用户设备占用是指:所述给定多载波符号未被所述用户设备用于发送无线信号。As an embodiment, given that the multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment means that the given multi-carrier symbol is not used by the user equipment to transmit a wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述第二信息是半静态配置的。As an embodiment, the second information is semi-statically configured.
作为一个实施例,所述第二信息由更高层信令承载。As an embodiment, the second information is carried by higher layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第二信息由RRC信令承载。As an embodiment, the second information is carried by RRC signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第二信息是一个RRC信令中的一个IE的全部或一部分。As an embodiment, the second information is all or a part of an IE in one RRC signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第二信息由MAC CE信令承载。As an embodiment, the second information is carried by MAC CE signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第二信息在SIB中传输。As an embodiment, the second information is transmitted in the SIB.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息是半静态配置的。As an embodiment, the third information is semi-statically configured.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由更高层信令承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by higher layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由RRC信令承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by RRC signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息是一个RRC信令中的一个IE的全部或一部分。As an embodiment, the third information is all or a part of an IE in one RRC signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由MAC CE信令承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by MAC CE signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息在SIB中传输。As an embodiment, the third information is transmitted in the SIB.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息是动态配置的。As an embodiment, the third information is dynamically configured.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由物理层信令承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by physical layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息属于DCI。As an embodiment, the third information belongs to a DCI.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息是一个DCI中的一个域,所述域包括正整数个比特。As an embodiment, the third information is a domain in a DCI, the domain comprising a positive integer number of bits.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由下行物理层控制信道承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by a downlink physical layer control channel.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由PDCCH承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by a PDCCH.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由sPDCCH承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by the sPDCCH.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由NR-PDCCH承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by the NR-PDCCH.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息由NB-PDCCH承载。As an embodiment, the third information is carried by the NB-PDCCH.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息指示所述M1个参考信号的发送功率。As an embodiment, the third information indicates a transmission power of the M1 reference signals.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述所述M1个参考信号的发送功率是多个备选发送功率中之一。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, the transmit power of the M1 reference signals is one of a plurality of candidate transmit powers.
作为一个实施例,所述第三信息指示所述M1个参考信号的发送功率和所述M个参考信号的发送功率是否相同。In one embodiment, the third information indicates whether the transmit power of the M1 reference signals and the transmit power of the M reference signals are the same.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息是半静态配置的。As an embodiment, the fourth information is semi-statically configured.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息由更高层信令承载。As an embodiment, the fourth information is carried by higher layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息由RRC信令承载。As an embodiment, the fourth information is carried by RRC signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息是一个RRC信令中的一个IE的全部或一部分。As an embodiment, the fourth information is all or a part of an IE in one RRC signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息由MAC CE信令承载。As an embodiment, the fourth information is carried by MAC CE signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息在SIB中传输。As an embodiment, the fourth information is transmitted in the SIB.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息显式的指示所述S个备选空口资源分别对应S个多载波符号组。As an embodiment, the fourth information explicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to S multi-carrier symbol groups.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息隐式的指示所述S个备选空口资源分别对应S个多载波符号组。As an embodiment, the fourth information implicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to S multi-carrier symbol groups.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个子天线端口集合。As an embodiment, the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S sub-antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息显式的指示所述S个备选空口资源分别和所述S个子天线端口集合一一对应。As an embodiment, the fourth information explicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources are respectively in one-to-one correspondence with the S sub-antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述第四信息隐式的指示所述S个备选空口资源分别和所述S个子天线端口集合一一对应。 As an embodiment, the fourth information implicitly indicates that the S candidate air interface resources are respectively in one-to-one correspondence with the S sub-antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述K等于1,所述K个天线端口集合包括所述N1个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets include the N1 antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述K等于1,所述K个天线端口集合由所述N1个天线端口组组成。As an embodiment, the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets are composed of the N1 antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述K等于1,所述第一信息被用于从所述K个天线端口集合中确定所述N1个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the K is equal to 1, and the first information is used to determine the N1 antenna port groups from the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述K大于1,所述第一信息被用于从所述K个天线端口集合中确定所述N1个天线端口组所属的天线端口集合。In one embodiment, the K is greater than 1, and the first information is used to determine, from the set of K antenna ports, a set of antenna ports to which the N1 antenna port groups belong.
作为一个实施例,所述K等于1,所述M1个参考信号与所述M个参考信号的发送天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合,所述第一信息被用于从所述K个天线端口集合中确定所述所述M1个参考信号的发送天线端口组和所述M个参考信号的发送天线端口组。As an embodiment, the K is equal to 1, the M1 reference signals and the transmit antenna port group of the M reference signals belong to the K antenna port set, and the first information is used from the K The transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals and the transmit antenna port group of the M reference signals are determined in the set of antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,所述K大于1,所述M1个参考信号与所述M个参考信号的发送天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中的同一个天线端口集合,所述第一信息被用于从所述K个天线端口集合中确定所述同一个天线端口集合。In one embodiment, the K is greater than 1, and the transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals belong to a same one of the K antenna port sets, the first information. Used to determine the same set of antenna ports from the set of K antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,所述K大于1,所述M1个参考信号与所述M个参考信号的发送天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中的不同的天线端口集合,所述第一信息被用于从所述K个天线端口集合中确定所述M个参考信号的发送天线端口组所属的天线端口集合和所述M1个参考信号的发送天线端口组所属的天线端口集合。In one embodiment, the K is greater than 1, and the transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals belong to different antenna port sets in the K antenna port set, the first information. An antenna port set to which the transmit antenna port group to which the M reference signals belong and the set of antenna ports to which the transmit antenna port group of the M1 reference signals belong is determined from the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述K等于1,所述K个天线端口集合包括所述Q个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets include the Q antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述K等于1,所述K个天线端口集合由所述Q个天线端口组组成。As an embodiment, the K is equal to 1, and the K antenna port sets are composed of the Q antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述K个天线端口集合中任意两个天线端口组上发送的无线信号的发送功率相同。As an embodiment, the transmission power of the wireless signals transmitted on any two of the K antenna port sets is the same.
作为一个实施例,所述K个天线端口集合中至少两个天线端口组上发送的无线信号的发送功率相同。As an embodiment, the transmission power of the wireless signals transmitted on at least two of the K antenna port sets is the same.
作为一个实施例,所述K个天线端口集合中的一个天线端口集合中的任意两个天线端口组上发送的无线信号的发送功率相同。As an embodiment, the transmission power of the wireless signals transmitted on any two antenna port groups in the one of the K antenna port sets is the same.
实施例6Example 6
实施例6示例了另一个无线传输的流程图,如附图6所示。在附图6中,基站N03是用户设备U04的服务小区维持基站。附图6中,方框F4、F5、F6和F7是可选的。Embodiment 6 illustrates a flow chart of another wireless transmission, as shown in FIG. In FIG. 6, base station N03 is a serving cell maintenance base station of user equipment U04. In Figure 6, blocks F4, F5, F6 and F7 are optional.
对于N03,在步骤S30中发送第二信息;在步骤S31中发送第一信息;在步骤S32中发送第四信息;在步骤S33中接收M个参考信号;在步骤S34中发送第五信息;在步骤S35中发送第三信息;在步骤S36中接收M1个参考信号。For N03, the second information is transmitted in step S30; the first information is transmitted in step S31; the fourth information is transmitted in step S32; the M reference signals are received in step S33; the fifth information is transmitted in step S34; The third information is transmitted in step S35; the M1 reference signals are received in step S36.
对于U04,在步骤S40中接收第二信息;在步骤S41中接收第一信息;在步骤S42中接收第四信息;在步骤S43中执行第一接入检测;在步骤S44中发送M个参考信号;在步骤S45中接收第五信息;在步骤S46中接收第三信息;在步骤S47中执行第二接入检测;在步骤S48中发送M1个参考信号。For U04, the second information is received in step S40; the first information is received in step S41; the fourth information is received in step S42; the first access detection is performed in step S43; and M reference signals are transmitted in step S44. Receiving the fifth information in step S45; receiving the third information in step S46; performing second access detection in step S47; transmitting M1 reference signals in step S48.
在实施例6中,所述第一信息被所述U04用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;所述U04执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号;所述M个参考信号被所述N03用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被所述N03分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。所述第二信息被所述U04用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K 是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。所述第三信息被所述U04用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。所述第四信息被所述U04用于确定本申请中的所述S个备选空口资源分别对应本申请中的所述S个多载波符号组。所述第五信息被所述U04用于确定所述第一子频带上的N3个多载波符号,所述N3是大于1的正整数;所述U04执行第二接入检测,确定所述N3个多载波符号中的M1个多载波符号;其中,所述第二接入检测的执行先于所述M1个参考信号的发送;对于所述N3个多载波符号,所述用户设备仅在其中的所述M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号;所述M1个参考信号被所述N03用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号,所述M1是不大于所述N3的正整数。In Embodiment 6, the first information is used by the U04 to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first subband, the N being a positive integer greater than one; the U04 performing a first access detection, Determining M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols; for the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, transmitting M references respectively in only the M multi-carrier symbols Signals; the M reference signals are used by the N03 to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated by the N03 to N1 antenna port groups The M reference signals are sent by the U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups, where M is a positive integer not greater than the N, and the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M. The N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N. Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in the M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, and transmitting power of any one of the M1 reference signals and any one of the M reference signals The transmission power is the same, at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M multi-carrier symbols after that. The second information is used by the U04 to determine a set of K antenna ports, the K Is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to the K antenna ports One of the collections. The third information is used by the U04 to determine that the transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, the third information. The reception is prior to the transmission of the M1 reference signals. The fourth information is used by the U04 to determine that the S candidate air interface resources in the present application respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups in the present application. The fifth information is used by the U04 to determine N3 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, the N3 is a positive integer greater than 1; the U04 performs a second access detection, and determines the N3 M1 multi-carrier symbols in the multi-carrier symbols; wherein the execution of the second access detection precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals; for the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the user equipment is only in the Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in the M1 multicarrier symbols; the M1 reference signals are used by the N03 to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols, where the M1 is Not more than a positive integer of the N3.
作为一个实施例,上述方法包括:执行第二接入检测,确定N3个多载波符号中的M1个多载波符号;As an embodiment, the foregoing method includes: performing second access detection, determining M1 multi-carrier symbols in N3 multi-carrier symbols;
其中,所述第二接入检测的执行先于所述M1个参考信号的发送;所述第一信息被用于确定所述第一子频带上的所述N3个多载波符号,所述N3是大于1的正整数;对于所述N3个多载波符号,所述用户设备仅在其中的所述M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号;所述M1个参考信号被用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号,所述M1是不大于所述N3的正整数。The performing of the second access detection precedes the sending of the M1 reference signals; the first information is used to determine the N3 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, the N3 Is a positive integer greater than 1; for the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the user equipment transmits M1 reference signals only in the M1 multi-carrier symbols therein; the M1 reference signals are used for The M1 multicarrier symbols are determined in the N3 multicarrier symbols, and the M1 is a positive integer not greater than the N3.
作为一个实施例,所述N3等于所述N。As an embodiment, the N3 is equal to the N.
作为一个实施例,所述N3不等于所述N。As an embodiment, the N3 is not equal to the N.
作为一个实施例,所述N个多载波符号和所述N3个多载波符号分别属于两个上行突发。As an embodiment, the N multicarrier symbols and the N3 multicarrier symbols belong to two uplink bursts, respectively.
作为一个实施例,上述方法包括:接收第五信息,所述第五信息被用于确定所述第一子频带上的N3个多载波符号,所述N3是大于1的正整数;As an embodiment, the method includes: receiving fifth information, where the fifth information is used to determine N3 multicarrier symbols on the first subband, the N3 being a positive integer greater than one;
执行第二接入检测,确定所述N3个多载波符号中的M1个多载波符号;Performing second access detection, determining M1 multi-carrier symbols in the N3 multi-carrier symbols;
其中,所述第二接入检测的执行先于所述M1个参考信号的发送;对于所述N3个多载波符号,所述用户设备仅在其中的所述M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号;所述M1个参考信号被用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号,所述M1是不大于所述N3的正整数。The performing of the second access detection is preceded by the sending of the M1 reference signals; for the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the user equipment sends the M1 only in the M1 multi-carrier symbols. Reference signals; the M1 reference signals are used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols, the M1 being a positive integer not greater than the N3.
作为一个实施例,所述N3个多载波符号被分配给Q个天线端口组;所述M1个参考信号被所述Q个天线端口组中的Q1个天线端口组发送,所述M1个参考信号中至少一个参考信号被所述Q1个天线端口组中的同一个天线端口组发送,所述Q1是不大于所述M1的正整数,所述Q是不大于所述N3的正整数。As an embodiment, the N3 multicarrier symbols are allocated to Q antenna port groups; the M1 reference signals are sent by Q1 antenna port groups in the Q antenna port groups, the M1 reference signals At least one reference signal is transmitted by the same antenna port group in the Q1 antenna port group, the Q1 is a positive integer not greater than the M1, and the Q is a positive integer not greater than the N3.
作为一个实施例,所述Q个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。As an embodiment, the Q antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述K等于1,所述第五信息被用于从所述K个天线端口集合中确定所述Q个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the K is equal to 1, and the fifth information is used to determine the Q antenna port groups from the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述K大于1,所述第五信息被用于从所述K个天线端口集合中确定所述Q个天线端口组所属的天线端口集合。As an embodiment, the K is greater than 1, and the fifth information is used to determine, from the set of K antenna ports, an antenna port set to which the Q antenna port groups belong.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联。As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联是指:所述第一信息和所述第五信息分别是同一个DCI格式(format)在不同时刻上发送的信息。As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information, that is, the first information and the fifth information are information that are sent by the same DCI format at different times.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联是指:所述第一信息和所述第五信息分别是同一个DCI格式(format)中的一个域在不同时刻上发送的信息。As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the first information and the fifth information are respectively sent by a domain in the same DCI format at different times. Information.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联是指:所述K等于1,所述第一信息和所述第五信息都从所述K个天线端口集合中确定天线端口组。As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the K is equal to 1, and the first information and the fifth information are both determined from the set of K antenna ports. Port group.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联是指:所述K大于1,所述第一信息和所述第五信息都从所述K个天线端口集合中确定天线端口集合。 As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the K is greater than 1, and the first information and the fifth information are both determined from the set of K antenna ports. Port collection.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联是指:所述第五信息与所述第一信息的发送时间都属于第一时间窗。As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information, that is, the sending time of the fifth information and the first information belong to a first time window.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联是指:所述第五信息对应的所述M1个参考信号的发送时间与所述第一信息对应的所述M个参考信号的发送时间都属于第一时间窗。As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the sending time of the M1 reference signals corresponding to the fifth information is the M reference corresponding to the first information. The transmission time of the signal belongs to the first time window.
作为一个实施例,所述第五信息与所述第一信息相关联是指:所述第五信息与所述第一信息对应同一个测量过程,所述M1个参考信号的发送与所述M个参考信号的发送都为了所述同一个测量过程。As an embodiment, the fifth information is associated with the first information, where the fifth information and the first information correspond to the same measurement process, and the sending of the M1 reference signals and the M The transmission of the reference signals is for the same measurement process.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述同一个测量过程是波束管理(Beam Management)和/或信道估计。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the same measurement process is Beam Management and/or channel estimation.
作为一个实施例,所述第二接入检测的执行的结束时间在所述N3个多载波符号的起始时间之前。As an embodiment, the end time of execution of the second access detection is before the start time of the N3 multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述第二接入检测的执行的结束时间在所述M1个多载波符号的起始时间之前。As an embodiment, the end time of execution of the second access detection is before the start time of the M1 multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述第二接入检测被用于确定所述N3个多载波符号中仅有所述M1个多载波符号能被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the second access detection is used to determine that only the M1 multicarrier symbols of the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号被所述M1个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号,所述M1是不大于所述N3的正整数。In one embodiment, the M1 reference signals are used by a receiver of the M1 reference signals to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols, where the M1 is not greater than the N3 Positive integer.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号都被用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号。As an embodiment, the M1 reference signals are all used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号中的部分参考信号被用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号。As an embodiment, a portion of the M1 reference signals are used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号中的第一个参考信号被用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号。As an embodiment, a first one of the M1 reference signals is used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号中的一个给定参考信号被用于从所述N3个多载波符号中确定所述M1个多载波符号。As an embodiment, one of the M1 reference signals is used to determine the M1 multicarrier symbols from the N3 multicarrier symbols.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述给定参考信号是预定义的。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the given reference signal is predefined.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述给定参考信号是由更高层信令配置的。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the given reference signal is configured by higher layer signaling.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述给定参考信号是由物理层信令配置的。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the given reference signal is configured by physical layer signaling.
实施例7Example 7
实施例7A至实施例7E分别示例了一个N个多载波符号、N1个天线端口组和M个参考信号的关系的示意图。Embodiments 7A to 7E respectively illustrate schematic diagrams of the relationship of one N multicarrier symbols, N1 antenna port groups, and M reference signals.
在实施例7中,本申请中的所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。In Embodiment 7, the N multicarrier symbols in the present application are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals are transmitted by U1 antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port groups. M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
作为一个实施例,所述N1个天线端口组中任一天线端口组对应所述N个多载波符号中的至少一个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号中任一多载波符号对应所述N1个天线端口组中之一,所述N1不小于所述N2且不大于所述N的正整数。In one embodiment, any one of the N1 antenna port groups corresponds to at least one of the N multicarrier symbols, and any one of the N multicarrier symbols corresponds to the One of N1 antenna port groups, the N1 is not less than the N2 and is not greater than a positive integer of the N.
作为一个实施例,所述N1等于所述N,所述N个多载波符号分别被分配给所述N1个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the N1 is equal to the N, and the N multicarrier symbols are respectively allocated to the N1 antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述N1等于1,所述N个多载波符号被分配给同一个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the N1 is equal to 1, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to the same antenna port group.
作为一个实施例,所述N1大于1且小于所述N,所述N个多载波符号中至少两个连续的多载波符号被分配给所述N1个天线端口组中的同一个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the N1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and at least two consecutive multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols are allocated to the same one of the N1 antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述U1等于所述M,所述M个参考信号分别被U1个天线端口组发送。As an embodiment, the U1 is equal to the M, and the M reference signals are respectively sent by the U1 antenna port group.
作为一个实施例,所述U1等于1,所述M个参考信号被同一个天线端口组发送,所述N 个多载波符号在时域上是连续的。As an embodiment, the U1 is equal to 1, and the M reference signals are sent by the same antenna port group, where the N The multicarrier symbols are contiguous in the time domain.
作为一个实施例,所述U1大于1且小于所述M,所述M个参考信号中至少两个在时域上占用连续的多载波符号的参考信号被所述U1个天线端口组中的同一个天线端口组发送。As an embodiment, the U1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the M, and at least two of the M reference signals occupy a continuous multicarrier symbol in the time domain, and are referenced by the U1 antenna port group. An antenna port group is sent.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例7A对应所述N1等于所述N,所述U1等于所述M的N个多载波符号、N1个天线端口组和M个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 7A corresponds to the relationship that the N1 is equal to the N, and the U1 is equal to the relationship between the N multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals of the M.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例7B对应所述N1等于1,所述U1等于1的N个多载波符号、N1个天线端口组和M个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 7B corresponds to a schematic diagram of a relationship between N multi-carrier symbols, N1 antenna port groups, and M reference signals, where the N1 is equal to 1.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例7C对应所述N1大于1且小于所述N,所述U1等于所述M的N个多载波符号、N1个天线端口组和M个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 7C corresponds to the relationship that the N1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and the U1 is equal to the relationship between the N multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals of the M. .
作为一个实施例,所述实施例7D对应所述N1大于1且小于所述N,所述U1等于1的N个多载波符号、N1个天线端口组和M个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 7D corresponds to a relationship between the N multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port groups, and the M reference signals, where the N1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and the U1 is equal to 1.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例7E对应所述N1大于1且小于所述N,所述U1大于1且小于所述M的N个多载波符号、N1个天线端口组和M个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 7E corresponds to the N1 being greater than 1 and smaller than the N, the U1 being greater than 1 and smaller than the M multi-carrier symbols, the N1 antenna port group, and the M reference signals. Schematic diagram of the relationship.
实施例8Example 8
实施例8A至实施例8E分别示例了一个N3个多载波符号、Q个天线端口组和M1个参考信号的关系的示意图。Embodiments 8A to 8E respectively illustrate schematic diagrams of the relationship of one N3 multicarrier symbols, Q antenna port groups, and M1 reference signals.
在实施例7中,本申请中的所述N3个多载波符号被分配给Q个天线端口组;所述M1个参考信号被所述Q个天线端口组中的Q1个天线端口组发送,所述M1个参考信号中至少一个参考信号被所述Q1个天线端口组中的同一个天线端口组发送,所述Q1是不大于所述M1的正整数,所述Q是不大于所述N3的正整数。In Embodiment 7, the N3 multicarrier symbols in the present application are allocated to Q antenna port groups; the M1 reference signals are transmitted by Q1 antenna port groups in the Q antenna port groups, At least one of the M1 reference signals is transmitted by the same antenna port group in the Q1 antenna port group, the Q1 is a positive integer not greater than the M1, and the Q is not greater than the N3 A positive integer.
作为一个实施例,所述Q个天线端口组中任一天线端口组对应所述N3个多载波符号中的至少一个多载波符号,所述N3个多载波符号中任一多载波符号对应所述Q个天线端口组中之一,所述Q不小于所述P1且不大于所述N3的正整数。In one embodiment, any one of the Q antenna port groups corresponds to at least one of the N3 multicarrier symbols, and any one of the N3 multicarrier symbols corresponds to the One of the Q antenna port groups, the Q is not less than the P1 and is not greater than a positive integer of the N3.
作为一个实施例,所述Q等于所述N3,所述N3个多载波符号分别被分配给所述Q个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the Q is equal to the N3, and the N3 multicarrier symbols are respectively allocated to the Q antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述Q等于1,所述N3个多载波符号被分配给同一个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the Q is equal to 1, and the N3 multicarrier symbols are allocated to the same antenna port group.
作为一个实施例,所述Q大于1且小于所述N3,所述N3个多载波符号中至少两个连续的多载波符号被分配给所述Q个天线端口组中的同一个天线端口组。As an embodiment, the Q is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and at least two consecutive multi-carrier symbols of the N3 multi-carrier symbols are allocated to the same one of the Q antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述Q1等于所述M1,所述M1个参考信号分别被Q1个天线端口组发送。As an embodiment, the Q1 is equal to the M1, and the M1 reference signals are respectively sent by Q1 antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述Q1等于1,所述M1个参考信号被同一个天线端口组发送,所述N3个多载波符号在时域上是连续的。As an embodiment, the Q1 is equal to 1, and the M1 reference signals are transmitted by the same antenna port group, and the N3 multi-carrier symbols are continuous in the time domain.
作为一个实施例,所述Q1大于1且小于所述M1,所述M1个参考信号中至少两个在时域上占用连续的多载波符号的参考信号被所述Q1个天线端口组中的同一个天线端口组发送。As an embodiment, the Q1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the M1, and at least two reference signals occupying consecutive multi-carrier symbols in the time domain are the same in the Q1 antenna port group. An antenna port group is sent.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例8A对应所述Q等于所述N3,所述Q1等于所述M1的N3个多载波符号、Q个天线端口组和M1个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 8A corresponds to the Q being equal to the N3, and the Q1 is equal to a relationship between the N3 multi-carrier symbols of the M1, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例8B对应所述Q等于1,所述Q1等于1的N3个多载波符号、Q个天线端口组和M1个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 8B corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the Q is equal to 1, and the Q1 is equal to 1 for N3 multi-carrier symbols, Q antenna port groups, and M1 reference signals.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例8C对应所述Q大于1且小于所述N3,所述Q1等于所述M1的N3个多载波符号、Q个天线端口组和M1个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 8C corresponds to the relationship that the Q is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and the Q1 is equal to the relationship between the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals of the M1. .
作为一个实施例,所述实施例8D对应所述Q大于1且小于所述N3,所述Q1等于1的N3个多载波符号、Q个天线端口组和M1个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 8D corresponds to a schematic diagram of a relationship between the N3 multi-carrier symbols, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals, where the Q is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and the Q1 is equal to 1.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例8E对应所述Q大于1且小于所述N3,所述Q1大于1且小于所述M1的N3个多载波符号、Q个天线端口组和M1个参考信号的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 8E corresponds to the Q being greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, where the Q1 is greater than 1 and less than the N3 multicarrier symbols of the M1, the Q antenna port groups, and the M1 reference signals. Schematic diagram of the relationship.
实施例9Example 9
实施例9示例了一个M1个参考信号和M个参考信号的关系的示意图,如附图9所示。Embodiment 9 exemplifies a relationship of M1 reference signals and M reference signals, as shown in FIG.
在实施例9中,本申请中的所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。In Embodiment 9, the transmission power of any one of the M1 reference signals in the present application is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one of the reference signals is not described. The multi-carrier symbol occupied by the user equipment, the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and after the M multi-carrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号与所述M个参考信号被同一个天线端口组发送。As an embodiment, the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals are transmitted by the same antenna port group.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号与所述M个参考信号被不同的天线端口组发送。As an embodiment, the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals are transmitted by different antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号中至少一个参考信号与所述M个参考信号中任一参考信号被不同的天线端口组发送。In one embodiment, at least one of the M1 reference signals and any one of the M reference signals are transmitted by different antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号中至少一个参考信号与所述M个参考信号中至少一个参考信号被相同的天线端口组发送。As an embodiment, at least one of the M1 reference signals and at least one of the M reference signals are transmitted by the same antenna port group.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号和所述M个参考信号的发送时间都属于第一时间窗。As an embodiment, the transmission times of the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals all belong to a first time window.
作为一个实施例,属于第一时间窗的上行参考信号的发送功率相同,所述上行参考信号包括所述M1个参考信号和所述M个参考信号。As an embodiment, the uplink reference signals belonging to the first time window have the same transmission power, and the uplink reference signal includes the M1 reference signals and the M reference signals.
作为一个实施例,所述第一时间窗在时域上包括多个多载波符号。As an embodiment, the first time window includes a plurality of multi-carrier symbols in the time domain.
作为一个实施例,所述第一时间窗在时域上包括多个时隙(slot)。As an embodiment, the first time window includes a plurality of slots in the time domain.
作为一个实施例,所述第一时间窗在时域上包括多个上行突发。As an embodiment, the first time window includes a plurality of uplink bursts in the time domain.
作为一个实施例,所述第一时间窗是预定义的。As an embodiment, the first time window is predefined.
作为一个实施例,所述第一时间窗是由更高层信令配置的。As an embodiment, the first time window is configured by higher layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述第一时间窗是由物理层信令配置的。As an embodiment, the first time window is configured by physical layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号的发送与所述M个参考信号的发送都为了同一个测量过程。As an embodiment, the transmission of the M1 reference signals and the transmission of the M reference signals are all for the same measurement process.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述同一个测量过程是波束管理(Beam Management)和/或信道估计。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the same measurement process is Beam Management and/or channel estimation.
作为一个实施例,所述M1个参考信号的发送时间和所述M个参考信号的发送时间分别属于两个上行突发(UL burst)。As an embodiment, the transmission time of the M1 reference signals and the transmission time of the M reference signals belong to two uplink bursts (UL bursts), respectively.
作为一个实施例,一个上行突发由一组连续的多载波符号组成。As an embodiment, an upstream burst consists of a set of consecutive multi-carrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述用户设备在一个上行突发中发送无线信号。As an embodiment, the user equipment transmits a wireless signal in an uplink burst.
作为一个实施例,所述用户设备在一个上行突发中的每个多载波符号上都发送无线信号。As an embodiment, the user equipment transmits a wireless signal on each multi-carrier symbol in an uplink burst.
作为一个实施例,两个上行突发在时域上正交。As an embodiment, the two upstream bursts are orthogonal in the time domain.
作为一个实施例,两个上行突发在时域上至少间隔一个多载波符号。As an embodiment, the two uplink bursts are separated by at least one multi-carrier symbol in the time domain.
实施例10Example 10
实施例10示例了一个M个参考信号被用于从N个多载波符号中确定M个多载波符号的示意图,如附图10所示。Embodiment 10 illustrates a schematic diagram in which one M reference signals are used to determine M multicarrier symbols from N multicarrier symbols, as shown in FIG.
在实施例10中,本申请中的目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。In Embodiment 10, the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group in the present application are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine the M multi-carrier symbols from the N multi-carrier symbols. The target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate air interface resources Separately used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups being composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, the S Is a positive integer greater than one.
作为一个实施例,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者隐式的从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号。As an embodiment, the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are implicitly determined by the receivers of the M reference signals from the N multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号。As an embodiment, the target reference signal group includes the M reference signals.
作为一个实施例,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中部分参考信号。As an embodiment, the target reference signal group includes a partial reference signal of the M reference signals.
作为一个实施例,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的第一个参考信号。 As an embodiment, the target reference signal group includes a first one of the M reference signals.
作为一个实施例,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的最后一个参考信号。As an embodiment, the target reference signal group includes the last one of the M reference signals.
作为一个实施例,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个给定参考信号。As an embodiment, the target reference signal group includes one of the M reference signals for a given reference signal.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述给定参考信号是预定义的。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the given reference signal is predefined.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述给定参考信号是由更高层信令配置的。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the given reference signal is configured by higher layer signaling.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述给定参考信号是由物理层信令配置的。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the given reference signal is configured by physical layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述空口资源包括{时域资源,频域资源,码域资源}中的至少之一。As an embodiment, the air interface resource includes at least one of {time domain resource, frequency domain resource, and code domain resource}.
作为一个实施例,所述空口资源是时域资源。As an embodiment, the air interface resource is a time domain resource.
作为一个实施例,所述空口资源是频域资源。As an embodiment, the air interface resource is a frequency domain resource.
作为一个实施例,所述空口资源是码域资源。As an embodiment, the air interface resource is a code domain resource.
作为一个实施例,所述码域资源是指:所占用的特征序列是多个候选特征序列中之一。As an embodiment, the code domain resource refers to: the occupied feature sequence is one of a plurality of candidate feature sequences.
作为一个实施例,所述码域资源是指:所占用的特征序列在多个候选特征序列中的索引。As an embodiment, the code domain resource refers to an index of the occupied feature sequence in multiple candidate feature sequences.
作为一个实施例,所述S个多载波符号组包括的多载波符号数目互不相同。As an embodiment, the S multi-carrier symbol groups include different numbers of multi-carrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述S个多载波符号组包括的多载波符号互不相同。As an embodiment, the multi-carrier symbols included in the S multi-carrier symbol groups are different from each other.
作为一个实施例,所述S个多载波符号组中不包括两个完全相同的多载波符号组。As an embodiment, two identical multi-carrier symbol groups are not included in the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
作为一个实施例,所述S个多载波符号组中任意两个多载波符号组包括至少一个不相同的多载波符号。As an embodiment, any two of the S multi-carrier symbol groups include at least one different multi-carrier symbol.
作为一个实施例,所述S个多载波符号组中任意两个多载波符号组不包括相同的多载波符号。As an embodiment, any two of the S multi-carrier symbol groups do not include the same multi-carrier symbol.
作为一个实施例,所述S个多载波符号组分别被分配给S个子天线端口集合,所述S个备选空口资源分别和所述S个子天线端口集合一一对应。As an embodiment, the S multi-carrier symbol groups are respectively allocated to the S sub-antenna port sets, and the S candidate air interface resources are respectively in one-to-one correspondence with the S sub-antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述S个子天线端口集合属于所述K个天线端口集合中的同一个天线端口集合,所述S个子天线端口集合中任一子天线端口集合包括一个或多个天线端口组。In one embodiment, the S sub-antenna port sets belong to the same one of the K antenna port sets, and any one of the S sub-antenna port sets includes one or more antenna port groups. .
作为一个实施例,所述S个子天线端口集合中任一子天线端口集合包括一个或多个天线端口组,所述S个子天线端口集合中的全部天线端口组都属于所述N1个天线端口组。In one embodiment, any one of the S antenna antenna port sets includes one or more antenna port groups, and all of the S antenna antenna port groups belong to the N1 antenna port group. .
作为一个实施例,所述M个多载波符号属于所述S个多载波符号组中之一。As an embodiment, the M multicarrier symbols belong to one of the S multicarrier symbol groups.
作为一个实施例,所述M个多载波符号属于所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源所对应的所述S个多载波符号组中之一。As an embodiment, the M multi-carrier symbols belong to one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups corresponding to the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group.
作为一个实施例,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述S个多载波符号组中确定一个多载波符号组。As an embodiment, the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine one multi-carrier symbol group from the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
作为一个实施例,所述U1个天线端口组属于所述S个子天线端口集合中之一。As an embodiment, the U1 antenna port group belongs to one of the S sub-antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述U1个天线端口组属于所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源所对应的所述S个子天线端口集合中之一。As an embodiment, the U1 antenna port group belongs to one of the S sub-antenna port sets corresponding to the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group.
作为一个实施例,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述S个子天线端口集合中确定一个子天线端口集合。As an embodiment, the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine a set of sub-antenna ports from the set of S sub-antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,所述S个备选空口资源和S个多载波符号组的一一对应关系是预定义的。As an embodiment, the one-to-one correspondence between the S candidate air interface resources and the S multi-carrier symbol groups is predefined.
实施例11Example 11
实施例11A至实施例11B分别示例了一个第一接入检测和N1个天线端口组的关系的示意图。Embodiments 11A to 11B respectively illustrate a schematic diagram of a relationship between a first access detection and N1 antenna port groups.
在实施例11中,本申请中的所述第一接入检测包括N2次接入检测,所述N2次接入检测中任意一次接入检测被用于确定所述N个多载波符号中的至少一个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送,并且所述N个多载波符号中的任一多载波符号能否被用于上行发送都被所述N2次接入检测中之一确定,所述N2是不大于所述N的正整数。In the embodiment 11, the first access detection in the application includes N2 access detection, and any one of the N2 access detections is used to determine the N multi-carrier symbols. Whether at least one multi-carrier symbol can be used for uplink transmission, and whether any one of the N multi-carrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission is determined by one of the N2 access detections, N2 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接入检测的执行的结束时间在所述N个多载波符号的起始时间之前。 As an embodiment, the end time of execution of the first access detection is before the start time of the N multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接入检测的执行的结束时间在所述M个多载波符号的起始时间之前。As an embodiment, the end time of execution of the first access detection is before the start time of the M multi-carrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接入检测被用于确定所述N个多载波符号中仅有所述M个多载波符号能被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the first access detection is used to determine that only the M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述N2等于所述N,所述N2次接入检测分别被用于确定所述N个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the N2 is equal to the N, and the N2 access detections are respectively used to determine whether the N multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述N2等于1,所述N2次接入检测被用于确定所述N个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the N2 is equal to 1, and the N2 access detection is used to determine whether the N multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述N2大于1且小于所述N,所述N2次接入检测中之一被用于确定所述N个多载波符号中的至少两个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the N2 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N, and one of the N2 access detections is used to determine whether at least two multicarrier symbols of the N multicarrier symbols can be used. Send upstream.
作为一个实施例,所述N2次接入检测的多天线相关的接收互不相同。As an embodiment, the multiple antenna related receptions of the N2 access detection are different from each other.
作为一个实施例,所述N1个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送与所述N2次接入检测的多天线相关的接收有关。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission of the N1 antenna port groups is related to the multi-antenna related reception of the N2 access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述N1等于所述N2,所述N1个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送分别被用于确定所述N2次接入检测的多天线相关的接收。As an embodiment, the N1 is equal to the N2, and the multiple antenna related transmissions of the N1 antenna port groups are respectively used to determine the multi-antenna related reception of the N2 access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述N1等于所述N2,所述N2次接入检测的多天线相关的接收分别包括所述N1个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the N1 is equal to the N2, and the multiple antenna related reception of the N2 access detection includes multiple antenna related transmissions of the N1 antenna port groups, respectively.
作为一个实施例,所述N1等于所述N2,所述N1个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送分别与所述N2次接入检测的多天线相关的接收相同。As an embodiment, the N1 is equal to the N2, and the multiple antenna related transmissions of the N1 antenna port groups are respectively the same as the multiple antennas related to the N2 access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述N1大于所述N2,所述N2次接入检测的多天线相关的接收分别由所述N1个天线端口组中的至少一个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送确定。As an embodiment, the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multiple antenna-related reception of the N2 access detection is determined by multi-antenna-related transmission of at least one of the N1 antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述N1大于所述N2,所述N2次接入检测中任一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收包括所述N1个天线端口组中的至少一个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of any one of the N2 access detections includes multiple antennas of at least one of the N1 antenna port groups. Related to send.
作为一个实施例,所述N1大于所述N2,所述N2次接入检测中任一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收与所述N1个天线端口组中的至少一个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送相同。In one embodiment, the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of any one of the N2 access detections and the multi-antenna of at least one of the N1 antenna port groups The related send is the same.
作为一个实施例,所述N1大于所述N2,所述N2次接入检测中至少一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收由所述N1个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送确定。As an embodiment, the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection in the N2 access detection is performed by at least two antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port group. Antenna related transmission determination.
作为一个实施例,所述N1大于所述N2,所述N2次接入检测中至少一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收包括所述N1个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection in the N2 access detection includes a plurality of at least two antenna port groups in the N1 antenna port group. Antenna related transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述N1大于所述N2,所述N2次接入检测中至少一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收与所述N1个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送相同。In one embodiment, the N1 is greater than the N2, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection and the at least two antenna port groups of the N1 antenna port group are the N2 access detection. The antenna related transmission is the same.
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测被用于确定所述第一子频带是否闲置(Idle)。As an embodiment, the one-time access detection is used to determine if the first sub-band is idle (Idle).
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测被用于确定能否在所述第一子频带上使用与所述一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收相同的多天线相关的发送进行上行传输。As an embodiment, the one-time access detection is used to determine whether uplink transmission may be performed on the first sub-band using the same multi-antenna related transmission associated with the multi-antenna of the one-time access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的接收是空间接收参数(Spatial Rx parameters)。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception is a spatial Rx parameter.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的接收是接收波束。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception is a receive beam.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的接收是接收波束赋型矩阵。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception is a receive beamforming matrix.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的接收是接收模拟波束赋型矩阵。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception is a receive analog beam shaping matrix.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的接收是接收波束赋型向量。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception is a receive beamforming vector.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的接收是接收空间滤波(spatial filtering)。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception is receive spatial filtering.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的发送是空间发送参数(Spatial Tx parameters)。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission is a spatial transmission parameter (Spatial Tx parameters).
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的发送是发送波束。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission is a transmit beam.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的发送是发送波束赋型矩阵。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission is a transmit beam shaping matrix.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的发送是发送模拟波束赋型矩阵。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission is to transmit an analog beamforming matrix.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的发送是发送波束赋型向量。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission is a transmit beamforming vector.
作为一个实施例,所述多天线相关的发送是发送空间滤波。 As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission is transmission spatial filtering.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例11A对应所述N2等于所述N1的第一接入检测和N1个天线端口组的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 11A corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the N2 is equal to the relationship between the first access detection of the N1 and the N1 antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例11B对应所述N2小于所述N1的第一接入检测和N1个天线端口组的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 11B corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the N2 is smaller than the relationship between the first access detection of the N1 and the N1 antenna port groups.
实施例12Example 12
实施例12A至实施例12B分别示例了一个给定接入检测和给定无线信号的空间关系的示意图。Embodiments 12A through 12B respectively illustrate schematic diagrams of a given access detection and spatial relationship of a given wireless signal.
在实施例12中,所述给定接入检测与本申请中的所述第一接入检测或所述第二接入检测中的一次接入检测对应,所述给定无线信号与本申请中的所述M个参考信号中的至少一个参考信号或所述M1个参考信号中的至少一个参考信号对应。In Embodiment 12, the given access detection corresponds to one access detection in the first access detection or the second access detection in the present application, the given wireless signal and the present application At least one of the M reference signals or at least one of the M1 reference signals corresponds to.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的多天线相关的接收能被用于推断出所述给定无线信号的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception used by the given access detection can be used to infer multi-antenna related transmission of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的多天线相关的接收和所述给定无线信号的多天线相关的发送相同。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception used by the given access detection is the same as the multi-antenna related transmission of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的多天线相关的接收和所述给定无线信号的多天线相关的发送不同。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related reception used by the given access detection is different from the multi-antenna related transmission of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的接收波束赋型矩阵对应的波束宽度大于所述给定无线信号的发送波束赋型矩阵对应的波束宽度。As an embodiment, a beamwidth corresponding to a receive beamforming matrix used by a given access detection is greater than a beamwidth corresponding to a transmit beamforming matrix of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的接收波束赋型矩阵对应的波束方向包括所述给定无线信号的发送波束赋型矩阵对应的波束方向。As an embodiment, the beam direction corresponding to the receive beamforming matrix used by the given access detection includes a beam direction corresponding to a transmit beamforming matrix of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的接收波束对应的波束宽度大于所述给定无线信号的发送波束对应的波束宽度。As an embodiment, the beam width corresponding to the received beam used by the given access detection is greater than the beam width corresponding to the transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的接收波束包括所述给定无线信号的发送波束。As an embodiment, the receive beam used by the given access detection includes a transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的天线数目小于所述给定无线信号的发送天线数目。As an embodiment, the number of antennas used for a given access detection is less than the number of transmit antennas for the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的天线数目大于1。As an embodiment, the number of antennas used for the given access detection is greater than one.
作为一个实施例,所述给定接入检测所使用的天线数目等于1。As an embodiment, the number of antennas used for the given access detection is equal to one.
作为一个实施例,所述给定无线信号的发送天线数目大于1。As an embodiment, the number of transmit antennas for a given wireless signal is greater than one.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例12A对应所述给定接入检测所使用的接收波束和所述给定无线信号的发送波束相同的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 12A corresponds to the same schematic diagram of the receive beam used by the given access detection and the transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例12B对应所述给定接入检测所使用的接收波束包括所述给定无线信号的发送波束的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 12B corresponds to a schematic diagram of a transmit beam used by the given access detection including a transmit beam of the given wireless signal.
实施例13Example 13
实施例13示例了一个天线端口和天线端口组的示意图,如附图13所示。Embodiment 13 illustrates a schematic diagram of an antenna port and an antenna port group, as shown in FIG.
在实施例13中,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;一个天线端口由正整数个天线组中的天线通过天线虚拟化(Virtualization)叠加而成;一个天线组包括正整数根天线。一个天线组通过一个RF(Radio Frequency,射频)chain(链)连接到基带处理器,不同天线组对应不同的RF chain。给定天线端口包括的正整数个天线组内的所有天线到所述给定天线端口的映射系数组成所述给定天线端口对应的波束赋型向量。所述给定天线端口包括的正整数个天线组内的任一给定天线组包括的多根天线到所述给定天线端口的映射系数组成所述给定天线组的模拟波束赋型向量。所述正整数个天线组对应的模拟波束赋型向量对角排列构成所述给定天线端口对应的模拟波束赋型矩阵。所述正整数个天线组到所述给定天线端口的映射系数组成所述给定天线端口对应的数字波束赋 型向量。所述给定天线端口对应的波束赋型向量是由所述给定天线端口对应的模拟波束赋型矩阵和数字波束赋型向量的乘积得到的。一个天线端口组中的不同天线端口由相同的天线组构成,同一个天线端口组中的不同天线端口对应不同的波束赋型向量。In Embodiment 13, one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; one antenna port is formed by superposition of antennas in a positive integer number of antenna groups by antenna virtualization; one antenna group includes a positive integer antenna. An antenna group is connected to the baseband processor through an RF (Radio Frequency) chain, and different antenna groups correspond to different RF chains. A mapping coefficient of all antennas within a positive integer number of antenna groups included in a given antenna port to the given antenna port constitutes a beamforming vector corresponding to the given antenna port. The mapping coefficients of the plurality of antennas included in any given antenna group included in a given integer number of antenna groups included in the given antenna port to the given antenna port constitute an analog beamforming vector of the given antenna group. The diagonal arrangement of the analog beamforming vectors corresponding to the positive integer antenna groups constitutes an analog beam shaping matrix corresponding to the given antenna port. The mapping coefficients of the positive integer antenna group to the given antenna port constitute a digital beam assignment corresponding to the given antenna port Type vector. The beamforming vector corresponding to the given antenna port is obtained by multiplying the analog beam shaping matrix and the digital beam shaping vector corresponding to the given antenna port. Different antenna ports in one antenna port group are composed of the same antenna group, and different antenna ports in the same antenna port group correspond to different beamforming vectors.
附图13中示出了两个天线端口组:天线端口组#0和天线端口组#1。其中,所述天线端口组#0由天线组#0构成,所述天线端口组#1由天线组#1和天线组#2构成。所述天线组#0中的多个天线到所述天线端口组#0的映射系数组成模拟波束赋型向量#0,所述天线组#0到所述天线端口组#0的映射系数组成数字波束赋型向量#0。所述天线组#1中的多个天线和所述天线组#2中的多个天线到所述天线端口组#1的映射系数分别组成模拟波束赋型向量#1和模拟波束赋型向量#2,所述天线组#1和所述天线组#2到所述天线端口组#1的映射系数组成数字波束赋型向量#1。所述天线端口组#0中的任一天线端口对应的波束赋型向量是由所述模拟波束赋型向量#0和所述数字波束赋型向量#0的乘积得到的。所述天线端口组#1中的任一天线端口对应的波束赋型向量是由所述模拟波束赋型向量#1和所述模拟波束赋型向量#2对角排列构成的模拟波束赋型矩阵和所述数字波束赋型向量#1的乘积得到的。Two antenna port groups are shown in Figure 13: antenna port group #0 and antenna port group #1. The antenna port group #0 is composed of an antenna group #0, and the antenna port group #1 is composed of an antenna group #1 and an antenna group #2. The mapping coefficients of the plurality of antennas in the antenna group #0 to the antenna port group #0 constitute an analog beamforming vector #0, and the mapping coefficients of the antenna group #0 to the antenna port group #0 constitute a number Beamforming vector #0. The mapping coefficients of the plurality of antennas in the antenna group #1 and the plurality of antennas in the antenna group #2 to the antenna port group #1 constitute an analog beamforming vector #1 and an analog beamforming vector #, respectively. 2. The mapping coefficients of the antenna group #1 and the antenna group #2 to the antenna port group #1 constitute a digital beamforming vector #1. A beamforming vector corresponding to any one of the antenna port groups #0 is obtained by multiplying the analog beamforming vector #0 and the digital beamforming vector #0. The beamforming vector corresponding to any antenna port in the antenna port group #1 is an analog beam shaping matrix formed by diagonally arranging the analog beamforming vector #1 and the analog beamforming vector #2 Obtained from the product of the digital beamforming vector #1.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组包括一个天线端口。例如,附图13中的所述天线端口组#0包括一个天线端口。As an embodiment, one antenna port group includes one antenna port. For example, the antenna port group #0 in FIG. 13 includes one antenna port.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述一个天线端口对应的模拟波束赋型矩阵降维成模拟波束赋型向量,所述一个天线端口对应的数字波束赋型向量降维成一个标量,所述一个天线端口对应的波束赋型向量等于所述一个天线端口对应的模拟波束赋型向量。例如,附图13中的所述数字波束赋型向量#0降维成一个标量,所述天线端口组#0中的天线端口对应的波束赋型向量是所述模拟波束赋型向量#0。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, the analog beamforming matrix corresponding to the one antenna port is reduced into an analog beamforming vector, and the digital beamforming vector corresponding to the one antenna port is reduced to a scalar. The beamforming vector corresponding to one antenna port is equal to the analog beamforming vector corresponding to the one antenna port. For example, the digital beamforming vector #0 in FIG. 13 is reduced to a scalar, and the beamforming vector corresponding to the antenna port in the antenna port group #0 is the analog beamforming vector #0.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组包括多个天线端口。例如,附图13中的所述天线端口组#1包括多个天线端口。As an embodiment, one antenna port group includes a plurality of antenna ports. For example, the antenna port group #1 in FIG. 13 includes a plurality of antenna ports.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述多个天线端口对应相同的模拟波束赋型矩阵。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the plurality of antenna ports correspond to the same analog beam shaping matrix.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述多个天线端口中至少两个天线端口对应相同的模拟波束赋型矩阵。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, at least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to the same analog beam shaping matrix.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述多个天线端口中至少两个天线端口对应不同的模拟波束赋型矩阵。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, at least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to different analog beam shaping matrices.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述多个天线端口对应不同的数字波束赋型向量。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the plurality of antenna ports correspond to different digital beamforming vectors.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述多个天线端口中至少两个天线端口对应相同的数字波束赋型向量。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, at least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to the same digital beamforming vector.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述多个天线端口中至少两个天线端口对应不同的数字波束赋型向量。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, at least two of the plurality of antenna ports correspond to different digital beamforming vectors.
作为一个实施例,不同的天线端口组中的任意两个天线端口对应不同的模拟波束赋型矩阵。As an embodiment, any two antenna ports of different antenna port groups correspond to different analog beam shaping matrices.
作为一个实施例,不同的天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口对应不同的模拟波束赋型矩阵。As an embodiment, at least two of the different antenna port groups correspond to different analog beam shaping matrices.
作为一个实施例,不同的天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口对应相同的模拟波束赋型矩阵。As an embodiment, at least two of the different antenna port groups correspond to the same analog beam shaping matrix.
作为一个实施例,两个不同的天线端口组是QCL(Quasi Co-Located,准共址)。As an embodiment, two different antenna port groups are QCL (Quasi Co-Located).
作为一个实施例,两个不同的天线端口组不是QCL。As an embodiment, two different antenna port groups are not QCLs.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的任意两个天线端口是QCL。As an embodiment, any two of the antenna port groups are QCLs.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的任意两个天线端口不是QCL。As an embodiment, any two of the antenna port groups are not QCL.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口是QCL。As an embodiment, at least two of the antenna port groups are QCLs.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口不是QCL。As an embodiment, at least two of the antenna port groups are not QCL.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的任意两个天线端口是spatial QCL。 As an embodiment, any two of the antenna port groups are spatial QCLs.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的任意两个天线端口不是spatial QCL。As an embodiment, any two antenna ports in an antenna port group are not spatial QCLs.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口是spatial QCL。As an embodiment, at least two of the antenna port groups are spatial QCLs.
作为一个实施例,一个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口不是spatial QCL。As an embodiment, at least two of the antenna port groups are not spatial QCLs.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分大尺度(large-scale)特性(properties)推断出两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分大尺度特性。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are QCL means that all or part of the large-scale properties of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports can be inferred. All or part of the large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是QCL是指:所述两个天线端口至少有一个相同的QCL参数(QCL parameter),所述QCL参数包括多天线相关的QCL参数和多天线无关的QCL参数。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports being QCL means that the two antenna ports have at least one identical QCL parameter, and the QCL parameters include multiple antenna related QCL parameters and multiple antenna independent QCL parameters. .
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口的至少一个QCL参数推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口的至少一个QCL参数。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports being QCL means that at least one QCL of the other of the two antenna ports can be inferred from at least one QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. parameter.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports being QCL means that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送,所述所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的接收者和所述所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的发送者相同。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on an antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another antenna port of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal sent on is the same.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分大尺度(large-scale)特性(properties)推断出两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分大尺度特性。As an embodiment, the fact that two antenna ports are not QCL means that all or part of the large-scale nature of the wireless signal transmitted from one of the two antenna ports cannot be inferred. All or part of the large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the two antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是QCL是指:所述两个天线端口至少有一个不同的QCL参数(QCL parameter),所述QCL参数包括多天线相关的QCL参数和多天线无关的QCL参数。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the two antenna ports have at least one different QCL parameter, and the QCL parameters include multiple antenna related QCL parameters and multiple antenna independent QCL parameters. .
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口的至少一个QCL参数推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口的至少一个QCL参数。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that at least one of the two antenna ports cannot be inferred from at least one QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. QCL parameters.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred to be another of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred to be another of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送,所述所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的接收者和所述所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的发送者相同。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are not QCL means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred to be another of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on one antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another antenna of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal sent on the port is the same.
作为一个实施例,多天线相关的QCL参数包括:{到达角(angle of arrival),离开角(angle of departure),空间相关性,多天线相关的发送,多天线相关的接收}中的一种或多种。 As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related QCL parameters include: {one of angle of arrival, angle of departure, spatial correlation, multi-antenna related transmission, multi-antenna related reception} Or a variety.
作为一个实施例,多天线无关的QCL参数包括:{延时扩展(delay spread),多普勒扩展(Doppler spread),多普勒移位(Doppler shift),路径损耗(path loss),平均增益(average gain)}中的一种或多种。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna-independent QCL parameters include: {delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, path loss, average gain One or more of (average gain)}.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是spatial QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分多天线相关的大尺度(large-scale)特性(properties)推断出两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分多天线相关的大尺度特性。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are spatial QCL refers to all or part of a multi-antenna related large-scale characteristic of a wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports ( Properties) Inferring all or part of the multi-antenna-related large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the two antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是spatial QCL是指:所述两个天线端口至少有一个相同的多天线相关的QCL参数(spatial QCL parameter)。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the two antenna ports have at least one identical multi-antenna related QCL parameter.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是spatial QCL的是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口的至少一个多天线相关的QCL参数推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口的至少一个多天线相关的QCL参数。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the other of the two antenna ports can be inferred from at least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. At least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of the antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是spatial QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是spatial QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are spatial QCL means that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on one antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口是spatial QCL是指:能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送,所述所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的接收者和所述所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的发送者相同。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, which means that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that can be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports infers the other of the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on one antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another antenna of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal sent on the port is the same.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是spatial QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分多天线相关的大尺度(large-scale)特性(properties)推断出两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的全部或者部分多天线相关的大尺度特性。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL refers to all or part of the multi-antenna related large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports. (properties) Inferring all or part of the multi-antenna-related large-scale characteristics of the wireless signal transmitted on the other of the two antenna ports.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是spatial QCL是指:所述两个天线端口至少有一个不同的多天线相关的QCL参数(spatial QCL parameter)。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, which means that the two antenna ports have at least one different multi-antenna related QCL parameter.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是spatial QCL的是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口的至少一个多天线相关的QCL参数推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口的至少一个多天线相关的QCL参数。As an embodiment, the fact that the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL means that one of the two antenna ports cannot be inferred from at least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of one of the two antenna ports. At least one multi-antenna related QCL parameter of an antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是spatial QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, meaning that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred from the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related reception of wireless signals transmitted on another antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是spatial QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, meaning that the multi-antenna related transmission of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred from the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of wireless signals transmitted on another antenna port.
作为一个实施例,两个天线端口不是spatial QCL是指:不能够从所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的接收推断出所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的多天线相关的发送,所述所述两个天线端口中的一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的接收者和所述所述两个天线端口中的另一个天线端口上发送的无线信号的发送者相同。As an embodiment, the two antenna ports are not spatial QCL, meaning that the multi-antenna related reception of the wireless signal that cannot be transmitted from one of the two antenna ports is inferred from the two antenna ports. Multi-antenna related transmission of a wireless signal transmitted on another antenna port, a receiver of a wireless signal transmitted on one of the two antenna ports, and another of the two antenna ports The sender of the wireless signal transmitted on the antenna port is the same.
作为一个实施例,给定无线信号的多天线相关的大尺度特性包括{到达角(angle of arrival),离开角(angle of departure),空间相关性,多天线相关的发送,多天线相关的接收}中的一种或者多种。 As an embodiment, the multi-element related large-scale characteristics of a given wireless signal include {angle of arrival, angle of departure, spatial correlation, multi-antenna related transmission, multi-antenna related reception One or more of }.
实施例14Example 14
实施例14A至实施例14B分别示例了一个第二接入检测和Q个天线端口组的关系的示意图。Embodiments 14A to 14B respectively illustrate a schematic diagram of a relationship between a second access detection and Q antenna port groups.
在实施例14中,本申请中的所述第二接入检测包括P1次接入检测,所述P1次接入检测中任意一次接入检测被用于确定所述N3个多载波符号中的至少一个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送,并且所述N3个多载波符号中的任一多载波符号能否被用于上行发送都被所述P1次接入检测中之一确定,所述P1是不大于所述N3的正整数。In the embodiment 14, the second access detection in the application includes P1 access detection, and any one of the P1 access detections is used to determine the N3 multicarrier symbols. Whether at least one multi-carrier symbol can be used for uplink transmission, and whether any one of the N3 multi-carrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission is determined by one of the P1 access detections, P1 is a positive integer not greater than the N3.
作为一个实施例,所述P1等于所述N3,所述P1次接入检测分别被用于确定所述N3个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the P1 is equal to the N3, and the P1 access detection is respectively used to determine whether the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述P1等于1,所述P1次接入检测被用于确定所述N3个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the P1 is equal to 1, and the P1 access detection is used to determine whether the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used for uplink transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述P1大于1且小于所述N3,所述P1次接入检测中之一被用于确定所述N3个多载波符号中的至少两个多载波符号能否被用于上行发送。As an embodiment, the P1 is greater than 1 and smaller than the N3, and one of the P1 access detections is used to determine whether at least two multicarrier symbols of the N3 multicarrier symbols can be used. Send upstream.
作为一个实施例,所述P1次接入检测的多天线相关的接收互不相同。As an embodiment, the multiple antenna related receptions of the P1 access detection are different from each other.
作为一个实施例,所述Q个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送与所述P1次接入检测的多天线相关的接收有关。As an embodiment, the multi-antenna related transmission of the Q antenna port groups is related to the reception of the multi-antenna related to the P1 access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述Q等于所述P1,所述Q个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送分别被用于确定所述P1次接入检测的多天线相关的接收。As an embodiment, the Q is equal to the P1, and the multiple antenna related transmissions of the Q antenna port groups are respectively used to determine the multi-antenna related reception of the P1 access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述Q等于所述P1,所述P1次接入检测的多天线相关的接收分别包括所述Q个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the Q is equal to the P1, and the multi-antenna related reception of the P1 access detection includes multiple antenna-related transmissions of the Q antenna port groups, respectively.
作为一个实施例,所述Q等于所述P1,所述Q个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送分别与所述P1次接入检测的多天线相关的接收相同。As an embodiment, the Q is equal to the P1, and the multiple antenna-related transmissions of the Q antenna port groups are respectively the same as the multiple antenna-related receptions of the P1 access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述Q大于所述P1,所述P1次接入检测的多天线相关的接收分别由所述Q个天线端口组中的至少一个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送确定。As an embodiment, the Q is greater than the P1, and the multi-antenna related reception of the P1 access detection is determined by multi-antenna related transmission of at least one of the Q antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述Q大于所述P1,所述P1次接入检测中任一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收包括所述Q个天线端口组中的至少一个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the Q is greater than the P1, and the multi-antenna related reception of any one of the P1 access detections includes multiple antennas of at least one of the Q antenna port groups. Related to send.
作为一个实施例,所述Q大于所述P1,所述P1次接入检测中任一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收与所述Q个天线端口组中的至少一个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送相同。In one embodiment, the Q is greater than the P1, and multiple antenna-related receptions of any one of the P1 access detections and multiple antennas of at least one of the Q antenna port groups are received. The related send is the same.
作为一个实施例,所述Q大于所述P1,所述P1次接入检测中至少一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收由所述Q个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送确定。As an embodiment, the Q is greater than the P1, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection in the P1 access detection is performed by at least two antenna port groups in the Q antenna port group. Antenna related transmission determination.
作为一个实施例,所述Q大于所述P1,所述P1次接入检测中至少一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收包括所述Q个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送。As an embodiment, the Q is greater than the P1, and the multi-antenna related reception of the access detection at least one of the P1 access detections includes at least two antenna port groups of the Q antenna port groups. Antenna related transmission.
作为一个实施例,所述Q大于所述P1,所述P1次接入检测中至少一次接入检测的多天线相关的接收与所述Q个天线端口组中的至少两个天线端口组的多天线相关的发送相同。As an embodiment, the Q is greater than the P1, and the multi-antenna related reception of the at least one access detection and the at least two antenna port groups of the Q antenna port group are the P1 access detection. The antenna related transmission is the same.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例14A对应所述P1等于所述Q的第二接入检测和Q个天线端口组的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 14A corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the P1 is equal to the relationship between the second access detection of the Q and the Q antenna port groups.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例14B对应所述P1小于所述Q的第二接入检测和Q个天线端口组的关系的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 14B corresponds to a schematic diagram in which the P1 is smaller than the relationship between the second access detection of the Q and the Q antenna port groups.
实施例15Example 15
实施例15A至实施例15C分别示例了一个一次接入检测的示意图。Embodiments 15A to 15C respectively illustrate a schematic diagram of one-time access detection.
在实施例15中,本申请中的所述一次接入检测包括:在T个时间子池中分别执行T次能量检测,得到T个检测值;其中,所述T个检测值中的T1个检测值都低于第一阈值;所述T是正整数,所述T1是不大于所述T的正整数。In the embodiment 15, the one-time access detection in the present application includes: performing T energy detections in T time sub-pools respectively, to obtain T detection values; wherein, T1 of the T detection values The detected values are all lower than the first threshold; the T is a positive integer, and the T1 is a positive integer not greater than the T.
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测是LBT,所述LBT的具体定义和实现方式参见 3GPP TR36.889。As an embodiment, the primary access detection is an LBT, and the specific definition and implementation manner of the LBT are described. 3GPP TR36.889.
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测是CCA(Clear Channel Assessment,空闲信道评估),所述CCA的具体定义和实现方式参见3GPP TR36.889。As an embodiment, the one-time access detection is a CCA (Clear Channel Assessment), and the specific definition and implementation manner of the CCA is referred to 3GPP TR36.889.
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测是上行接入检测。As an embodiment, the one-time access detection is uplink access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测是通过3GPP TS36.213中的15.2章节所定义的方式实现的。As an embodiment, the one-time access detection is implemented in the manner defined by Section 15.2 of 3GPP TS 36.213.
作为一个实施例,所述T1等于所述T。As an embodiment, the T1 is equal to the T.
作为一个实施例,所述T1小于所述T。As an embodiment, the T1 is smaller than the T.
作为一个实施例,所述T个检测值和所述第一阈值的单位都是dBm(毫分贝)。As an embodiment, the units of the T detection values and the first threshold are both dBm (millimeters).
作为一个实施例,所述T个检测值和所述第一阈值的单位都是毫瓦(mW)。As an embodiment, the units of the T detection values and the first threshold are both milliwatts (mW).
作为一个实施例,所述T个检测值和所述第一阈值的单位是焦耳。As an embodiment, the unit of the T detection values and the first threshold is Joule.
作为一个实施例,所述第一阈值等于或小于-72dBm。As an embodiment, the first threshold is equal to or less than -72 dBm.
作为一个实施例,所述第一阈值是等于或小于第一给定值的任意值。As an embodiment, the first threshold is any value equal to or smaller than the first given value.
作为一个实施例,所述第一阈值是由所述用户设备在等于或小于第一给定值的条件下自由选择的。As an embodiment, the first threshold is freely selected by the user equipment under conditions equal to or less than a first given value.
作为一个实施例,所述第一给定值是预定义的。As an embodiment, the first given value is predefined.
作为一个实施例,所述第一给定值是由更高层信令配置的。As an embodiment, the first given value is configured by higher layer signaling.
作为一个实施例,所述T个检测值中不属于所述T1个检测值的检测值中至少有一个检测值低于所述第一阈值。In one embodiment, at least one of the detected values that do not belong to the T1 detection values among the T detection values is lower than the first threshold.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块是所述第一子频带。As an embodiment, the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs is the first sub-band.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块是一个BWP。As an embodiment, the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs is a BWP.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块是一个载波。As an embodiment, the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs is a carrier.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块包括一组连续的RB。As an embodiment, the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs includes a group of consecutive RBs.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块包括一组连续的PRB。As an embodiment, the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs includes a set of consecutive PRBs.
作为一个实施例,所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块包括一组连续的子载波。As an embodiment, the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs includes a set of consecutive sub-carriers.
作为一个实施例,所述T个检测值分别是所述用户设备在T个时间单元中在所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块上感知(Sense)所有无线信号的功率,并在时间上平均,以获得的接收功率;所述T个时间单元分别是所述T个时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, the T detection values are respectively the power of the user equipment to sense (Sense) all wireless signals in the T time units in the frequency domain resource blocks to which the first sub-band belongs, and in time Up-averaging, the received power obtained; the T time units are each one of the T time sub-pools.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T个时间单元中的任一时间单元的持续时间不短于4微秒。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the duration of any one of the T time units is not shorter than 4 microseconds.
作为一个实施例,所述T个检测值分别是所述用户设备在T个时间单元中在所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块上感知(Sense)所有无线信号的能量,并在时间上平均,以获得的接收能量;所述T个时间单元分别是所述T个时间子池中的一个持续时间段。In one embodiment, the T detection values are energy that the user equipment senses all wireless signals in the T time units in the frequency domain resource blocks to which the first sub-band belongs, and in time Up-averaging, the received energy obtained; the T time units are each one of the T time sub-pools.
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测在T个时间子池上使用的多天线相关的接收都相同,所述T个检测值分别是所述用户设备在T个时间单元中用所述多天线相关的接收在所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块上感知(Sense)所有无线信号,并在时间上平均,以获得的接收功率或者接收能量;所述T个时间单元分别是所述T个时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, the multiple access detections used in the T time pools are all the same, and the T detection values are respectively used by the user equipment in the T time units. Correlation receiving Senses all wireless signals on a frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs, and averaging over time to obtain received power or received energy; the T time units are respectively One duration of the T time subpools.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次给定能量检测是指:所述用户设备在给定时间单元中监测接收功率,所述给定时间单元是所述T个时间子池中和所述给定能量检测对应的时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, any given energy detection in the T-th energy detection means that the user equipment monitors received power in a given time unit, and the given time unit is the T time sub-pools. Neutating a duration period in the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次给定能量检测是指:所述用户设备在给定时间单元中监测接收能量,所述给定时间单元是所述T个时间子池中和所述给定能量检测对应的时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, any given energy detection in the T-th energy detection means that the user equipment monitors received energy in a given time unit, and the given time unit is the T time sub-pools. Neutating a duration period in the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次给定能量检测是指:所述用户设备在给定时间单元中针对所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块上的所有无线信号进行感知 (Sense)以获得给定功率;所述给定时间单元是所述T个时间子池中和所述给定能量检测对应的时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, any given energy detection in the T-th power detection refers to: all the wireless signals on the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs in the given time unit. Perceive (Sense) to obtain a given power; the given time unit is one of the T time subpools and the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T个检测值中和所述给定能量检测对应的检测值是所述给定功率。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the detected value corresponding to the given energy detection in the T detection values is the given power.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次给定能量检测是指:所述用户设备在给定时间单元中针对所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块上的所有无线信号进行感知(Sense)以获得给定能量;所述给定时间单元是所述T个时间子池中和所述给定能量检测对应的时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, any given energy detection in the T-th power detection refers to: all the wireless signals on the frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs in the given time unit. Sense is performed to obtain a given energy; the given time unit is one of the T time subpools and the time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T个检测值中和所述给定能量检测对应的检测值是所述给定能量。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the detected value corresponding to the given energy detection in the T detection values is the given energy.
作为一个实施例,所述一次接入检测在T个时间子池上使用的多天线相关的接收都相同,所述T个检测值分别是所述用户设备在T个时间单元中用所述多天线相关的接收在所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块上感知(Sense)所有无线信号,并在时间上平均,以获得的接收功率或者接收能量;所述T个时间单元分别是所述T个时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, the multiple access detections used in the T time pools are all the same, and the T detection values are respectively used by the user equipment in the T time units. Correlation receiving Senses all wireless signals on a frequency domain resource block to which the first sub-band belongs, and averaging over time to obtain received power or received energy; the T time units are respectively One duration of the T time subpools.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次给定能量检测是指:所述用户设备在给定时间单元中用给定多天线相关的接收对所述第一子频带所属的频域资源块上的所有无线信号进行感知(Sense)以获得给定功率或给定能量;所述给定时间单元是所述T个时间子池中和所述给定能量检测对应的时间子池中的一个持续时间段。As an embodiment, any given energy detection in the T-th power detection refers to: the user equipment receives the frequency associated with the first sub-band with a given multi-antenna correlation in a given time unit. All wireless signals on the domain resource block are Senseed to obtain a given power or given energy; the given time unit is a time subpool corresponding to the given energy detection in the T time subpools One of the durations in the middle.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T个检测值中和所述给定能量检测对应的检测值是所述给定功率或给定能量。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the detected value corresponding to the given energy detection in the T detection values is the given power or a given energy.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述一次接入检测在T个时间子池上使用的多天线相关的接收都相同,所述多天线相关的接收是所述给定多天线相关的接收。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the primary access detection is the same for multiple antenna-related receptions used on T time sub-pools, and the multiple antenna-related reception is the given multiple antenna-related reception.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次能量检测是通过3GPP TS36.213中的15章节所定义的方式实现的。As an embodiment, any one of the T-th energy measurements is implemented by means defined in section 15 of 3GPP TS 36.213.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次能量检测是通过LTE LAA中的能量检测方式实现的。As an embodiment, any one of the T-th energy detections is implemented by an energy detection method in the LTE LAA.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次能量检测是LBT过程中的能量检测。As an embodiment, any one of the T-th energy detections is energy detection during the LBT process.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次能量检测是CCA过程中的能量检测。As an embodiment, any one of the T-th energy measurements is energy detection during the CCA process.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次能量检测是通过WiFi中的能量检测方式实现的。As an embodiment, any one of the T-th energy detections is implemented by an energy detection method in WiFi.
作为一个实施例,所述T次能量检测中的任意一次能量检测是通过对RSSI(Received Signal Strength Indication,接收信号强度指示)进行测量实现的。As an embodiment, any one of the T-th energy detections is performed by measuring RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中的任一时间子池占用的时域资源是连续的。As an embodiment, the time domain resources occupied by any one of the T time subpools are consecutive.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池在时域上是两两相互正交(不重叠)的。As an embodiment, the T time subpools are orthogonal to each other (non-overlapping) in the time domain.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中的任一时间子池的持续时间是{16微秒、9微秒}中之一。As an embodiment, the duration of any of the T time subpools is one of {16 microseconds, 9 microseconds}.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中至少存在两个时间子池的持续时间不相等。As an embodiment, at least two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools have unequal durations.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中任意两个时间子池的持续时间都相等。As an embodiment, the durations of any two of the T time subpools are equal.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池占用的时域资源是连续的。As an embodiment, the time domain resources occupied by the T time subpools are continuous.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中至少存在两个时间子池占用的时域资源是不连续。As an embodiment, the time domain resources occupied by at least two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools are discontinuous.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中任意两个时间子池占用的时域资源是不连续。As an embodiment, the time domain resources occupied by any two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools are discontinuous.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中任一时间子池是一个时隙(slot)。 As an embodiment, any one of the T time subpools is a slot.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中任一时间子池是Tsl,所述Tsl是一个时隙长度(slot duration),所述Tsl的具体定义参见3GPP TS36.213中的15.2章节。As an embodiment, any one of the T time subpools is T sl , and the T sl is a slot duration, and the specific definition of the T sl is as described in 3GPP TS 36.213. Section 15.2.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中除了最早的时间子池以外的任一时间子池是一个时隙(slot)。As an embodiment, any time sub-pool other than the earliest time sub-pool in the T time sub-pools is a slot.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中除了最早的时间子池以外的任一时间子池是Tsl,所述Tsl是一个时隙长度(slot duration),所述Tsl的具体定义参见3GPP TS36.213中的15.2章节。As an embodiment, any one of the T time subpools except the earliest time subpool is T sl , and the T sl is a slot duration, and the T sl is specific. See Section 15.2 of 3GPP TS 36.213 for definitions.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中至少存在一个持续时间为16微秒的时间子池。As an embodiment, at least one time sub-pool having a duration of 16 microseconds exists in the T time sub-pools.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中至少存在一个持续时间为9微秒的时间子池。As an embodiment, at least one time sub-pool having a duration of 9 microseconds exists in the T time sub-pools.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中的最早的时间子池的持续时间为16微秒。As an embodiment, the earliest time sub-pool of the T time sub-pools has a duration of 16 microseconds.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池中的最晚的时间子池的持续时间为9微秒。As an embodiment, the last time subpool of the T time subpools has a duration of 9 microseconds.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括Cat 4(第四类)LBT中的监听时间。As an embodiment, the T time subpools include a listening time in a Cat 4 (fourth class) LBT.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括Cat 4(第四类)LBT中的延时时段(Defer Duration)中的时隙和回退时间(Back-off Time)中的时隙。As an embodiment, the T time subpools include time slots in a Defer Duration in a Cat 4 (fourth class) LBT and time slots in a back-off time.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括Cat 2(第二类)LBT中的监听时间。As an embodiment, the T time subpools include a listening time in a Cat 2 (second class) LBT.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括Type 1 UL channel access procedure(第一类上行信道接入过程)中的延时时段(Defer Duration)中的时隙和回退时间(Back-off Time)中的时隙。As an embodiment, the T time sub-pools include a time slot and a back-off time (Back-off) in a Defer Duration in a Type 1 UL channel access procedure. Time slot in Time).
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括Type 2 UL channel access procedure(第二类上行信道接入过程)中的感知时间间隔(sensing interval)中的时隙,所述感知时间间隔的具体定义参见3GPP TS36.213中的15.2章节。As an embodiment, the T time subpools include time slots in a sensing interval in a Type 2 UL channel access procedure, the specific time interval of the sensing time interval See Section 15.2 of 3GPP TS 36.213 for definitions.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述感知时间间隔的持续时间是25微秒。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the duration of the sensing time interval is 25 microseconds.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括Type 2 UL channel access procedure(第二类上行信道接入过程)中的感知时间间隔(sensing interval)中的Tf和Tsl,所述Tf和所述Tsl是两个时间间隔,所述Tf和所述Tsl的具体定义参见3GPP TS36.213中的15.2章节。As an embodiment, the T time subpools include T f and T sl in a sensing interval in a Type 2 UL channel access procedure, the T f And the T sl is two time intervals, and the specific definition of the T f and the T sl is referred to the section 15.2 in 3GPP TS 36.213.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述Tf的持续时间是16微秒。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the duration of the Tf is 16 microseconds.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述Tsl的持续时间是9微秒。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the duration of the T sl is 9 microseconds.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括了初始CCA和eCCA(Enhanced Clear Channel Assessment,增强的空闲信道评估)中的时隙。As an embodiment, the T time subpools include time slots in an initial CCA and an eCCA (Enhanced Clear Channel Assessment).
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池中的任意两个时间子池的持续时间都相等,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池。As an embodiment, the durations of any two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pools are equal, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools. Time subpool.
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池中至少存在两个时间子池的持续时间不相等,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池。As an embodiment, the durations of at least two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pools are not equal, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools. Time subpool.
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池占用的时域资源是连续的,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池。As an embodiment, the time domain resources occupied by the T1 time sub-pools are consecutive, and the T1 time sub-pools are time sub-pools corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools.
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池中至少存在两个时间子池占用的时域资源是不连续的,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池。As an embodiment, the time domain resources occupied by at least two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pools are discontinuous, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively the T1 time sub-pools and the T1 The time subpool corresponding to the detected value.
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池中任意两个时间子池占用的时域资源是不连续的,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池。As an embodiment, the time domain resources occupied by any two time sub-pools in the T1 time sub-pool are discontinuous, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively detected in the T time sub-pools and the T1 detections. The time subpool corresponding to the value.
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池中包括所述T个时间子池中的最晚的时间子池,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池。As an embodiment, the T1 time sub-pools include the latest time sub-pools of the T time sub-pools, and the T1 time sub-pools are respectively the T1 time sub-pools and the T1 The time subpool corresponding to the detected value.
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池只包括了eCCA中的时隙,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池。As an embodiment, the T1 time sub-pools only include time slots in the eCCA, and the T1 time sub-pools are time sub-pools corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools.
作为一个实施例,所述T个时间子池包括T1个时间子池和T2个时间子池,所述T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池,所述T2个 时间子池中的任一时间子池不属于所述T1个时间子池;所述T2是不大于所述T减所述T1的正整数。As an embodiment, the T time sub-pools include T1 time sub-pools and T2 time sub-pools, where the T1 time sub-pools are respectively corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools Time sub-pool, the T2 The sub-pool of any time in the time sub-pool does not belong to the T1 time sub-pool; the T2 is a positive integer not greater than the T minus the T1.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T2个时间子池在所述T个时间子池中的位置是连续的。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the positions of the T2 time subpools in the T time subpools are continuous.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T2个时间子池包括了初始CCA中的时隙。As a sub-embodiment of the above embodiment, the T2 time subpools include time slots in the initial CCA.
作为一个实施例,T1个时间子池是所述T个时间子池中分别和所述T1个检测值对应的时间子池,所述T1个时间子池分别属于T1个子池集合,所述T1个子池集合中的任一子池集合包括所述T个时间子池中的正整数个时间子池;所述T1个子池集合中的任一时间子池对应的检测值小于所述第一阈值。As an embodiment, the T1 time sub-pools are time sub-pools corresponding to the T1 detection values in the T time sub-pools, and the T1 time sub-pools respectively belong to T1 sub-pool sets, and the T1 Any one of the sub-pool pools includes a positive integer number of time sub-pools in the T time pools; and the detected value corresponding to any one of the T1 sub-pool pools is smaller than the first threshold. .
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T1个子池集合中至少存在一个子池集合包括的时间子池的数量等于1。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, the number of time sub-pools included in the at least one sub-pool set in the T1 sub-pool set is equal to 1.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T1个子池集合中至少存在一个子池集合包括的时间子池的数量大于1。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, at least one sub-pool set in the T1 sub-pool set includes a number of time sub-pools greater than one.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T1个子池集合中至少存在两个子池集合包括的时间子池的数量是不相等的。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, the number of time sub-pools included in the at least two sub-pool sets in the T1 sub-pool set is unequal.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T个时间子池中不存在一个时间子池同时属于所述T1个子池集合中的两个子池集合。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, one time sub-pool does not exist in the T time sub-pools and belongs to two sub-pool sets in the T1 sub-pool set.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T1个子池集合中至少存在一个子池集合中的所有时间子池属于同一个延时时段(Defer Duration)。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, all time sub-pools in the at least one sub-pool set in the T1 sub-pool set belong to the same delay period (Defer Duration).
作为上述子实施例的一个参考实施例,一个延时时段(Defer Duration)的持续时间是16微秒再加上正整数个9微秒。As a reference embodiment of the above sub-embodiment, the duration of a Defer Duration is 16 microseconds plus a positive integer of 9 microseconds.
作为上述实施例的一个子实施例,所述T个时间子池中不属于所述T1个子池集合的时间子池中至少存在一个时间子池对应的检测值小于所述第一阈值。As a sub-embodiment of the foregoing embodiment, the detected value corresponding to at least one time sub-pool in the time sub-pool that does not belong to the T1 sub-pool set in the T time sub-pools is smaller than the first threshold.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例15A对应所述T个时间子池占用的时域资源是连续的一次接入检测的示意图。As an embodiment, the time domain resource occupied by the T time pools in the embodiment 15A is a schematic diagram of consecutive access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例15B对应所述T个时间子池中至少存在两个时间子池占用的时域资源是不连续的一次接入检测的示意图。As an embodiment, the embodiment 15B corresponds to a time-domain resource occupied by at least two time sub-pools in the T time sub-pools, which is a discontinuous one-time access detection.
作为一个实施例,所述实施例15C对应所述T个时间子池中任意两个时间子池占用的时域资源是不连续的一次接入检测的示意图。As an embodiment, the time domain resource occupied by any two time sub-pools in the T time pools is a schematic diagram of a discontinuous access detection.
实施例16Example 16
实施例16示例了一个UE中的处理装置的结构框图,如附图16所示。附图16中,UE处理装置1200主要由第一接收机模块1201和第一发射机模块1202组成。Embodiment 16 exemplifies a structural block diagram of a processing device in one UE, as shown in FIG. In FIG. 16, the UE processing apparatus 1200 is mainly composed of a first receiver module 1201 and a first transmitter module 1202.
-第一接收机模块1201:接收第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;a first receiver module 1201: receiving first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one; performing a first access detection Determining M multicarrier symbols in the N multicarrier symbols;
-第一发射机模块1202:对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号。a first transmitter module 1202: for the N multicarrier symbols on the first subband, transmitting M reference signals respectively in only the M multicarrier symbols therein.
在实施例16中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。In Embodiment 16, the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, Said M reference signals are transmitted by U1 antenna port groups in said N1 antenna port groups, said M being a positive integer not greater than said N, said U1 being a positive integer not greater than said M, said N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
作为一个实施例,所述第一发射机模块1202还在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号;其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号 之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。As an embodiment, the first transmitter module 1202 further transmits M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband; wherein any one of the M1 reference signals The transmission power is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is The M1 multi-carrier symbols Before and after the M multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接收机模块1201还接收第二信息;其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。As an embodiment, the first receiver module 1201 further receives second information; wherein the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and the K antenna port sets are Any of the antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; and the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接收机模块1201还接收第三信息;其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。As an embodiment, the first receiver module 1201 further receives third information, where the third information is used to determine a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals and the M The transmission power of any of the reference signals is the same, and the reception of the third information precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
作为一个实施例,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。As an embodiment, the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the target reference signal group Include one or more of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate air interface resources are used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, wherein any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, and the S is greater than 1 Integer.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接收机模块1201还接收第四信息;其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。As an embodiment, the first receiver module 1201 further receives fourth information, where the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接收机模块1201包括实施例4中的{接收器456、接收处理器452、控制器/处理器490}。As an embodiment, the first receiver module 1201 includes {receiver 456, receiving processor 452, controller/processor 490} in Embodiment 4.
作为一个实施例,所述第一接收机模块1201包括实施例4中的{接收器456、接收处理器452、控制器/处理器490}中的至少前二者。As an embodiment, the first receiver module 1201 includes at least two of the {receiver 456, the receiving processor 452, the controller/processor 490} in Embodiment 4.
作为一个实施例,所述第一发射机模块1202包括实施例4中的{发射器456、发射处理器455、控制器/处理器490}。As an embodiment, the first transmitter module 1202 includes {transmitter 456, transmit processor 455, controller/processor 490} in embodiment 4.
作为一个实施例,所述第一发射机模块1202包括实施例4中的{发射器456、发射处理器455、控制器/处理器490}中的至少前二者。As an embodiment, the first transmitter module 1202 includes at least the first two of {transmitter 456, transmit processor 455, controller/processor 490} in embodiment 4.
实施例17Example 17
实施例17示例了一个基站设备中的处理装置的结构框图,如附图17所示。附图17中,基站设备中的处理装置1300主要由第二发射机模块1301和第二接收机模块1302组成。Embodiment 17 exemplifies a structural block diagram of a processing device in a base station device, as shown in FIG. In FIG. 17, the processing device 1300 in the base station device is mainly composed of a second transmitter module 1301 and a second receiver module 1302.
-第二发射机模块1301:发送第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;a second transmitter module 1301: transmitting first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
-第二接收机模块1302:对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别接收M个参考信号。a second receiver module 1302: for the N multicarrier symbols on the first subband, M reference signals are respectively received in only the M multicarrier symbols therein.
在实施例17中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。In Embodiment 17, the M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, and the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, Said M reference signals are transmitted by U1 antenna port groups in said N1 antenna port groups, said M being a positive integer not greater than said N, said U1 being a positive integer not greater than said M, said N1 is a positive integer not greater than the N.
作为一个实施例,所述第二接收机模块1302还在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别接收M1个参考信号;其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。As an embodiment, the second receiver module 1302 further receives M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband; wherein any one of the M1 reference signals The transmission power is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is The M1 multicarrier symbols are preceded by the M multicarrier symbols.
作为一个实施例,所述第二发射机模块1301还发送第二信息;其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。 As an embodiment, the second transmitter module 1301 further sends second information; wherein the second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and the K antenna port sets are Any of the antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, one antenna port group includes a positive integer number of antenna ports; and the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
作为一个实施例,所述第二发射机模块1301还发送第三信息;其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。As an embodiment, the second transmitter module 1301 further sends third information, where the third information is used to determine a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals and the M The transmission power of any of the reference signals is the same, and the reception of the third information precedes the transmission of the M1 reference signals.
作为一个实施例,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。As an embodiment, the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are used by the receivers of the M reference signals to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the target reference signal group Include one or more of the M reference signals; the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is one of S candidate air interface resources, and the S candidate air interface resources are used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, wherein any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is composed of one or more multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols, and the S is greater than 1 Integer.
作为一个实施例,所述第二发射机模块1301还发送第四信息;其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。As an embodiment, the second transmitter module 1301 further sends fourth information, where the fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
作为一个子实施例,所述第二发射机模块1301包括实施例4中的{发射器416、发射处理器415、控制器/处理器440}。As a sub-embodiment, the second transmitter module 1301 includes {transmitter 416, transmit processor 415, controller/processor 440} in embodiment 4.
作为一个子实施例,所述第二发射机模块1301包括实施例4中的{发射器416、发射处理器415、控制器/处理器440}中的至少前二者。As a sub-embodiment, the second transmitter module 1301 includes at least the first two of {transmitter 416, transmit processor 415, controller/processor 440} in embodiment 4.
作为一个子实施例,所述第二接收机模块1302包括实施例4中的{接收器416、接收处理器412、控制器/处理器440}。As a sub-embodiment, the second receiver module 1302 includes {receiver 416, receiving processor 412, controller/processor 440} in Embodiment 4.
作为一个子实施例,所述第二接收机模块1302包括实施例4中的{接收器416、接收处理器412、控制器/处理器440}中的至少前二者。As a sub-embodiment, the second receiver module 1302 includes at least the first two of the {receiver 416, the receiving processor 412, and the controller/processor 440} in Embodiment 4.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解上述方法中的全部或部分步骤可以通过程序来指令相关硬件完成,所述程序可以存储于计算机可读存储介质中,如只读存储器,硬盘或者光盘等。可选的,上述实施例的全部或部分步骤也可以使用一个或者多个集成电路来实现。相应的,上述实施例中的各模块单元,可以采用硬件形式实现,也可以由软件功能模块的形式实现,本申请不限于任何特定形式的软件和硬件的结合。本申请中的UE或者终端包括但不限于手机,平板电脑,笔记本,上网卡,低功耗设备,eMTC设备,NB-IoT设备,车载通信设备等无线通信设备。本申请中的基站或者网络侧设备包括但不限于宏蜂窝基站,微蜂窝基站,家庭基站,中继基站,eNB,gNB,传输接收节点TRP等无线通信设备。One of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate that all or part of the above steps can be completed by a program to instruct related hardware, and the program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium such as a read only memory, a hard disk or an optical disk. Alternatively, all or part of the steps of the above embodiments may also be implemented using one or more integrated circuits. Correspondingly, each module unit in the above embodiment may be implemented in hardware form or in the form of a software function module. The application is not limited to any specific combination of software and hardware. The UE or the terminal in the present application includes but is not limited to a wireless communication device such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook, an internet card, a low power consumption device, an eMTC device, an NB-IoT device, and an in-vehicle communication device. The base station or network side device in this application includes, but is not limited to, a macro communication base station, a micro cell base station, a home base station, a relay base station, an eNB, a gNB, a transmission receiving node TRP, and the like.
以上所述,仅为本申请的较佳实施例而已,并非用于限定本申请的保护范围。凡在本申请的精神和原则之内,所做的任何修改,等同替换,改进等,均应包含在本申请的保护范围之内。 The above is only the preferred embodiment of the present application and is not intended to limit the scope of the present application. Any modifications, equivalents, improvements, etc. made within the spirit and principles of the present application are intended to be included within the scope of the present application.

Claims (14)

  1. 一种用于无线通信的用户设备中的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method in a user equipment for wireless communication, comprising:
    接收第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;Receiving first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
    执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;Performing first access detection, determining M multi-carrier symbols in the N multi-carrier symbols;
    对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号;For the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, only M reference signals are respectively sent in the M multi-carrier symbols;
    其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method of claim 1 comprising:
    在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别发送M1个参考信号;Transmitting M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband;
    其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。The transmission power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as the transmission power of any one of the M reference signals, and at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is present. The multi-carrier symbol not occupied by the user equipment is preceded by the M1 multi-carrier symbols and after the M multi-carrier symbols.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, comprising:
    接收第二信息;Receiving the second information;
    其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。The second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method according to claim 2 or 3, comprising:
    接收第三信息;Receiving third information;
    其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。The third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一权利要求所述的方法,其特征在于,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is used by the receiver of the M reference signals from the N multicarrier symbols Determining the M multi-carrier symbols, the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; and the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are S candidate air interface resources. The S candidate air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is represented by one of the N multi-carrier symbols or Composed of a plurality of multicarrier symbols, the S being a positive integer greater than one.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method of claim 5, comprising:
    接收第四信息;Receiving fourth information;
    其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。The fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  7. 一种用于无线通信的基站设备中的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method in a base station device for wireless communication, comprising:
    发送第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;Transmitting first information, the first information being used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first sub-band, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
    对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别接收M个参考信号;For the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, only M reference signals are respectively received in the M multi-carrier symbols;
    其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method of claim 7 comprising:
    在所述第一子频带上的M1个多载波符号中分别接收M1个参考信号;Receiving M1 reference signals respectively in M1 multicarrier symbols on the first subband;
    其中,所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参 考信号的发送功率相同,至少存在一个未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号,所述未被所述用户设备占用的多载波符号在所述M1个多载波符号之前且所述M个多载波符号之后。Wherein, the transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals and any one of the M reference signals The transmission power of the test signal is the same, at least one multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment, and the multi-carrier symbol that is not occupied by the user equipment is before the M1 multi-carrier symbols and the M After the carrier symbol.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, comprising:
    发送第二信息;Send the second message;
    其中,所述第二信息被用于确定K个天线端口集合,所述K是正整数,所述K个天线端口集合中的任一天线端口集合包括正整数个天线端口组,一个天线端口组包括正整数个天线端口;所述N1个天线端口组属于所述K个天线端口集合中之一。The second information is used to determine K antenna port sets, the K is a positive integer, and any one of the K antenna port sets includes a positive integer number of antenna port groups, and one antenna port group includes A positive integer number of antenna ports; the N1 antenna port groups belong to one of the K antenna port sets.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, comprising:
    发送第三信息;Send the third message;
    其中,所述第三信息被用于确定所述M1个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率与所述M个参考信号中的任一参考信号的发送功率相同,所述第三信息的接收先于所述M1个参考信号的发送。The third information is used to determine that a transmit power of any one of the M1 reference signals is the same as a transmit power of any one of the M reference signals, where the third information is Receiving transmissions prior to the M1 reference signals.
  11. 根据权利要求7至10中任一权利要求所述的方法,其特征在于,目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源被所述M个参考信号的接收者用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述目标参考信号组包括所述M个参考信号中的一个或者多个参考信号;所述目标参考信号组所占用的空口资源是S个备选空口资源之一,所述S个备选空口资源分别被用于确定S个多载波符号组,所述S个多载波符号组中任一多载波符号组都由所述N个多载波符号中的一个或多个多载波符号组成,所述S是大于1的正整数。The method according to any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein the air interface resource occupied by the target reference signal group is used by the receiver of the M reference signals from the N multicarrier symbols Determining the M multi-carrier symbols, the target reference signal group includes one or more reference signals of the M reference signals; and the air interface resources occupied by the target reference signal group are S candidate air interface resources. The S candidate air interface resources are respectively used to determine S multi-carrier symbol groups, and any one of the S multi-carrier symbol groups is represented by one of the N multi-carrier symbols or Composed of a plurality of multicarrier symbols, the S being a positive integer greater than one.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,包括:The method of claim 11 comprising:
    发送第四信息;Send the fourth message;
    其中,所述第四信息被用于确定所述S个备选空口资源分别对应所述S个多载波符号组。The fourth information is used to determine that the S candidate air interface resources respectively correspond to the S multi-carrier symbol groups.
  13. 一种用于无线通信的用户设备,其特征在于,包括:A user equipment for wireless communication, comprising:
    第一接收机模块,接收第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;执行第一接入检测,确定所述N个多载波符号中的M个多载波符号;The first receiver module receives the first information, the first information is used to determine N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, the N is a positive integer greater than 1; performing the first access detection, determining M multi-carrier symbols of the N multi-carrier symbols;
    第一发射机模块,对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别发送M个参考信号;a first transmitter module, for each of the N multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, transmitting M reference signals respectively in the M multi-carrier symbols;
    其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
  14. 一种用于无线通信的基站设备,其特征在于,包括:A base station device for wireless communication, comprising:
    第二发射机模块,发送第一信息,所述第一信息被用于确定第一子频带上的N个多载波符号,所述N是大于1的正整数;a second transmitter module, transmitting first information, where the first information is used to determine N multicarrier symbols on a first subband, the N being a positive integer greater than one;
    第二接收机模块,对于所述第一子频带上的所述N个多载波符号,仅在其中的所述M个多载波符号中分别接收M个参考信号;a second receiver module, for each of the M multi-carrier symbols on the first sub-band, receiving M reference signals respectively in the M multi-carrier symbols;
    其中,所述M个参考信号被用于从所述N个多载波符号中确定所述M个多载波符号,所述N个多载波符号被分配给N1个天线端口组,所述M个参考信号被所述N1个天线端口组中的U1个天线端口组发送,所述M是不大于所述N的正整数,所述U1是不大于所述M的正整数,所述N1是不大于所述N的正整数。 The M reference signals are used to determine the M multicarrier symbols from the N multicarrier symbols, the N multicarrier symbols are allocated to N1 antenna port groups, and the M references The signal is sent by the U1 antenna port group in the N1 antenna port group, the M is a positive integer not greater than the N, the U1 is a positive integer not greater than the M, and the N1 is not greater than The positive integer of N.
PCT/CN2017/116804 2017-12-18 2017-12-18 Method and device used in user equipment and in base station for wireless communication WO2019119174A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201780094871.6A CN111108797B (en) 2017-12-18 2017-12-18 Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
CN202310059650.2A CN116828599A (en) 2017-12-18 2017-12-18 User equipment, method and device in base station for wireless communication
CN202310060942.8A CN116939822A (en) 2017-12-18 2017-12-18 User equipment, method and device in base station for wireless communication
PCT/CN2017/116804 WO2019119174A1 (en) 2017-12-18 2017-12-18 Method and device used in user equipment and in base station for wireless communication

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2017/116804 WO2019119174A1 (en) 2017-12-18 2017-12-18 Method and device used in user equipment and in base station for wireless communication

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019119174A1 true WO2019119174A1 (en) 2019-06-27

Family

ID=66992872

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/116804 WO2019119174A1 (en) 2017-12-18 2017-12-18 Method and device used in user equipment and in base station for wireless communication

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (3) CN116939822A (en)
WO (1) WO2019119174A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016048227A2 (en) * 2014-09-25 2016-03-31 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for enhanced uplink reference signal in listen-before-talk systems
WO2016120761A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-08-04 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Random-access response with analog beamforming
US20160381589A1 (en) * 2015-06-24 2016-12-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for transmitting on multiple carriers of a shared radio frequency spectrum band
WO2017020293A1 (en) * 2015-08-06 2017-02-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for listening based transmission
CN106455116A (en) * 2016-06-13 2017-02-22 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Channel sounding reference signal frequency-hopping method and terminal
WO2017136085A1 (en) * 2016-02-05 2017-08-10 Intel IP Corporation Sounding reference signal in cellular systems

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016048227A2 (en) * 2014-09-25 2016-03-31 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for enhanced uplink reference signal in listen-before-talk systems
WO2016120761A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-08-04 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Random-access response with analog beamforming
US20160381589A1 (en) * 2015-06-24 2016-12-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for transmitting on multiple carriers of a shared radio frequency spectrum band
WO2017020293A1 (en) * 2015-08-06 2017-02-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for listening based transmission
WO2017136085A1 (en) * 2016-02-05 2017-08-10 Intel IP Corporation Sounding reference signal in cellular systems
CN106455116A (en) * 2016-06-13 2017-02-22 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Channel sounding reference signal frequency-hopping method and terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116828599A (en) 2023-09-29
CN111108797B (en) 2023-04-18
CN116939822A (en) 2023-10-24
CN111108797A (en) 2020-05-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019113766A1 (en) Method and device in user equipment and base station used for wireless communication
WO2019148488A1 (en) Method and apparatus in user equipment and base station used for wireless communication
WO2019154254A1 (en) Method and apparatus used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019109362A1 (en) Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019109345A1 (en) Method and device in user equipment and base station used for wireless communication
US12010047B2 (en) Method and device for wireless communication in UE and base station
WO2019179343A1 (en) Method and device used in user equipment and base station for radio communication
WO2020207245A1 (en) Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019154259A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device in base station and user equipment
WO2019184710A1 (en) Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019028687A1 (en) User equipment for wireless communication, method in base station and device
WO2019119197A1 (en) User equipment used in wireless communication, method in base station and device
WO2019109307A1 (en) Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019136681A1 (en) Method and apparatus used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019104703A1 (en) Method and device used in communication node for wireless communication
WO2019127012A1 (en) Method and apparatus used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019149242A1 (en) Method and apparatus for wireless communication in base station and user equipment
WO2019218134A1 (en) Method and apparatus used in user equipment of wireless communication and base station
CN111108698B (en) User equipment, base station and method therein used for wireless communication
CN111183665B (en) User equipment, method and device in base station for wireless communication
WO2019144315A1 (en) Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019134121A1 (en) Method and device used in wireless communication user equipment and base station
CN109842438B (en) Method and device used in user equipment and base station for wireless communication
WO2019213852A1 (en) Method and device for user equipment and base station used for wireless communication
WO2019119174A1 (en) Method and device used in user equipment and in base station for wireless communication

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17935713

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17935713

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 10/03/2021)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17935713

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1